OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/open8_urisc/open8_urisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories open8_urisc

[/] [open8_urisc/] [trunk/] [gnu/] [binutils/] [gas/] [doc/] [as.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 279

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 147 khays
\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
2
@c  Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3
@c  2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
4
@c  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5
@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
6
@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7
@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8
@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9
@c         in config/tc-*.c
10
@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11
@c         in config/obj-*.c
12
@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13
@c %**start of header
14
@setfilename as.info
15
@c ---config---
16
@macro gcctabopt{body}
17
@code{\body\}
18
@end macro
19
@c defaults, config file may override:
20
@set have-stabs
21
@c ---
22
@c man begin NAME
23
@c ---
24
@include asconfig.texi
25
@include bfdver.texi
26
@c ---
27
@c man end
28
@c ---
29
@c common OR combinations of conditions
30
@ifset COFF
31
@set COFF-ELF
32
@end ifset
33
@ifset ELF
34
@set COFF-ELF
35
@end ifset
36
@ifset AOUT
37
@set aout-bout
38
@end ifset
39
@ifset ARM/Thumb
40
@set ARM
41
@end ifset
42
@ifset Blackfin
43
@set Blackfin
44
@end ifset
45
@ifset BOUT
46
@set aout-bout
47
@end ifset
48
@ifset H8/300
49
@set H8
50
@end ifset
51
@ifset SH
52
@set H8
53
@end ifset
54
@ifset HPPA
55
@set abnormal-separator
56
@end ifset
57
@c ------------
58
@ifset GENERIC
59
@settitle Using @value{AS}
60
@end ifset
61
@ifclear GENERIC
62
@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63
@end ifclear
64
@setchapternewpage odd
65
@c %**end of header
66
 
67
@c @smallbook
68
@c @set SMALL
69
@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70
@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71
@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72
@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73
@c
74
@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75
@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76
@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77
@c break.
78
@c
79
@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80
@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
81
@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82
@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
83
@c discretion, of course.
84
@ifinfo
85
@set SMALL
86
@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87
@c might as well show 'em anyways.
88
@end ifinfo
89
 
90
@ifnottex
91
@dircategory Software development
92
@direntry
93
* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
94
* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
95
@end direntry
96
@end ifnottex
97
 
98
@finalout
99
@syncodeindex ky cp
100
 
101
@copying
102
This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
 
104
@c man begin COPYRIGHT
105
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106
2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107
Inc.
108
 
109
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113
Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
114
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
 
116
@c man end
117
@end copying
118
 
119
@titlepage
120
@title Using @value{AS}
121
@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122
@ifclear GENERIC
123
@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124
@end ifclear
125
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126
@sp 1
127
@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128
@end ifset
129
@sp 1
130
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131
@sp 1
132
@sp 13
133
The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134
Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135
first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136
The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137
distracting the boss while they got some work
138
done.
139
@sp 3
140
@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141
@page
142
@tex
143
{\parskip=0pt
144
\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145
\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146
}
147
%"boxit" macro for figures:
148
%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149
\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150
     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151
#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152
\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153
@end tex
154
 
155
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157
2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158
Inc.
159
 
160
      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161
      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162
      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163
      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164
      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
165
      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
 
167
@end titlepage
168
@contents
169
 
170
@ifnottex
171
@node Top
172
@top Using @value{AS}
173
 
174
This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177
@end ifset
178
version @value{VERSION}.
179
@ifclear GENERIC
180
This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182
@end ifclear
183
 
184
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185
Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
186
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
 
188
@menu
189
* Overview::                    Overview
190
* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
191
* Syntax::                      Syntax
192
* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
193
* Symbols::                     Symbols
194
* Expressions::                 Expressions
195
* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
196
@ifset ELF
197
* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
198
@end ifset
199
* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
200
* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
201
* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
202
* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
203
* AS Index::                    AS Index
204
@end menu
205
@end ifnottex
206
 
207
@node Overview
208
@chapter Overview
209
@iftex
210
This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211
@ifclear GENERIC
212
This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214
@end ifclear
215
@end iftex
216
 
217
@cindex invocation summary
218
@cindex option summary
219
@cindex summary of options
220
Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
221
see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
 
223
@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
 
225
@ignore
226
@c man begin SEEALSO
227
gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228
@c man end
229
@end ignore
230
 
231
@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232
@c to be limited to one line for the header.
233
@smallexample
234
@c man begin SYNOPSIS
235
@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236
 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237
 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238
 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239
 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240
 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241
 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242
 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243
 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244
 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245
 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246
 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247
 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248
 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249
@c
250
@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
251
@c Add an empty line for separation.
252
@ifset ALPHA
253
 
254
@emph{Target Alpha options:}
255
   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256
   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257
   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258
   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259
   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260
@end ifset
261
@ifset ARC
262
 
263
@emph{Target ARC options:}
264
   [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266
@end ifset
267
@ifset ARM
268
 
269
@emph{Target ARM options:}
270
@c Don't document the deprecated options
271
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272
   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273
   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274
   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275
   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276
   [@b{-mthumb}]
277
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278
   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279
    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280
   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281
@end ifset
282
@ifset Blackfin
283
 
284
@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286
   [@b{-mfdpic}]
287
   [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288
   [@b{-mnopic}]
289
@end ifset
290
@ifset CRIS
291
 
292
@emph{Target CRIS options:}
293
   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294
   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295
   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296
   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297
@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298
@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299
@end ifset
300
@ifset D10V
301
 
302
@emph{Target D10V options:}
303
   [@b{-O}]
304
@end ifset
305
@ifset D30V
306
 
307
@emph{Target D30V options:}
308
   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309
@end ifset
310 163 khays
@ifset EPIPHANY
311
 
312
@emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
313
   [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
314
@end ifset
315 147 khays
@ifset H8
316
 
317
@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
318
   [-h-tick-hex]
319
@end ifset
320
@ifset HPPA
321
@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
322
@end ifset
323
@ifset I80386
324
 
325
@emph{Target i386 options:}
326
   [@b{--32}|@b{--n32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
327
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
328
@end ifset
329
@ifset I960
330
 
331
@emph{Target i960 options:}
332
@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
333
   [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
334
    @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
335
   [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
336
@end ifset
337
@ifset IA64
338
 
339
@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
340
   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
341
   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
342
   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
343
   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
344
   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
345
   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
346
   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
347
@end ifset
348
@ifset IP2K
349
 
350
@emph{Target IP2K options:}
351
   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
352
@end ifset
353
@ifset M32C
354
 
355
@emph{Target M32C options:}
356
   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
357
@end ifset
358
@ifset M32R
359
 
360
@emph{Target M32R options:}
361
   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
362
   @b{--W[n]p}]
363
@end ifset
364
@ifset M680X0
365
 
366
@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
367
   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
368
@end ifset
369
@ifset M68HC11
370
 
371
@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
372
   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}]
373
   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
374
   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
375
   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
376
   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
377
   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
378
@end ifset
379
@ifset MCORE
380
 
381
@emph{Target MCORE options:}
382
   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
383
   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
384
@end ifset
385
@ifset MICROBLAZE
386
@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
387
@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
388
@end ifset
389
@ifset MIPS
390
 
391
@emph{Target MIPS options:}
392
   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
393
   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
394
   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
395
   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
396
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
397
   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
398
   [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
399
   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
400
   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
401
   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
402 160 khays
   [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
403 147 khays
   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
404
   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
405
   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
406
   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
407
   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
408
   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
409 160 khays
   [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
410 147 khays
   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
411
   [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
412
   [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
413
   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
414
   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
415
@end ifset
416
@ifset MMIX
417
 
418
@emph{Target MMIX options:}
419
   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
420
   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
421
   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
422
   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
423
@end ifset
424
@ifset PDP11
425
 
426
@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
427
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
428
   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
429
   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
430
@end ifset
431
@ifset PJ
432
 
433
@emph{Target picoJava options:}
434
   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
435
@end ifset
436
@ifset PPC
437
 
438
@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
439
   [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
440
   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
441
    @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
442
    @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|
443
    @b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
444
    @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpw7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
445
   [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
446
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
447
   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
448
   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
449
   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
450
   [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
451
@end ifset
452
@ifset RX
453
 
454
@emph{Target RX options:}
455
   [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
456
   [@b{-m32bit-ints}|@b{-m16bit-ints}]
457
   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
458
@end ifset
459
@ifset S390
460
 
461
@emph{Target s390 options:}
462
   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
463
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
464
   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
465
@end ifset
466
@ifset SCORE
467
 
468
@emph{Target SCORE options:}
469
   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
470
   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
471
   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
472
   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
473
@end ifset
474
@ifset SPARC
475
 
476
@emph{Target SPARC options:}
477
@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
478
   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
479
    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
480
   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
481
   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
482
@end ifset
483
@ifset TIC54X
484
 
485
@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
486
 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
487
 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
488
@end ifset
489
 
490
@ifset TIC6X
491
 
492
@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
493
   [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
494
   [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
495
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
496
@end ifset
497 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
498 147 khays
 
499 148 khays
@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
500 166 khays
   [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
501 148 khays
@end ifset
502
@ifset TILEPRO
503
@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
504
@end ifset
505
 
506 147 khays
@ifset XTENSA
507
 
508
@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
509
 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
510
 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
511
 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
512
 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
513
@end ifset
514
 
515
@ifset Z80
516
 
517
@emph{Target Z80 options:}
518
  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
519
  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
520
  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
521
  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
522
  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
523
  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
524
  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
525
@end ifset
526
 
527
@ifset Z8000
528
@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
529
@end ifset
530
 
531
@c man end
532
@end smallexample
533
 
534
@c man begin OPTIONS
535
 
536
@table @gcctabopt
537
@include at-file.texi
538
 
539
@item -a[cdghlmns]
540
Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
541
 
542
@table @gcctabopt
543
@item -ac
544
omit false conditionals
545
 
546
@item -ad
547
omit debugging directives
548
 
549
@item -ag
550
include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
551
 
552
@item -ah
553
include high-level source
554
 
555
@item -al
556
include assembly
557
 
558
@item -am
559
include macro expansions
560
 
561
@item -an
562
omit forms processing
563
 
564
@item -as
565
include symbols
566
 
567
@item =file
568
set the name of the listing file
569
@end table
570
 
571
You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
572
listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
573
the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
574
 
575
@item --alternate
576
Begin in alternate macro mode.
577
@ifclear man
578
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
579
@end ifclear
580
 
581
@item --compress-debug-sections
582
Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed
583
to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
584
compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
585
 
586
@item --nocompress-debug-sections
587
Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is the default.
588
 
589
@item -D
590
Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
591
other assemblers.
592
 
593
@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
594
When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
595
information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
596
 
597
@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
598
Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
599
@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
600
indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
601
value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
602
use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
603
 
604
@item -f
605
``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
606
compiler output).
607
 
608
@item -g
609
@itemx --gen-debug
610
Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
611
debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
612
ECOFF or DWARF2.
613
 
614
@item --gstabs
615
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
616
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
617
 
618
@item --gstabs+
619
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
620
extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
621
debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
622
may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
623
the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
624
 
625
@item --gdwarf-2
626
Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
627
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
628
option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
629
 
630
@item --size-check=error
631
@itemx --size-check=warning
632
Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
633
 
634
@item --help
635
Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
636
 
637
@item --target-help
638
Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
639
 
640
@item -I @var{dir}
641
Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
642
 
643
@item -J
644
Don't warn about signed overflow.
645
 
646
@item -K
647
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
648
This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
649
@end ifclear
650
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
651
Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
652
@end ifset
653
 
654
@item -L
655
@itemx --keep-locals
656
Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
657
system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
658
or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
659
@ifclear man
660
@xref{Symbol Names}.
661
@end ifclear
662
 
663
@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
664
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
665
listing to @var{number}.
666
 
667
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
668
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
669
lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
670
 
671
@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
672
Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
673
@var{number} bytes.
674
 
675
@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
676
Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
677
to @var{number} + 1.
678
 
679
@item -o @var{objfile}
680
Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
681
 
682
@item -R
683
Fold the data section into the text section.
684
 
685
@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
686
Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
687
@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
688
assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
689
memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
690
requirements at the expense of speed.
691
 
692
@item --reduce-memory-overheads
693
This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
694
assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
695
@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
696
 
697
@item --statistics
698
Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
699
assembly.
700
 
701
@item --strip-local-absolute
702
Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
703
 
704
@item -v
705
@itemx -version
706
Print the @command{as} version.
707
 
708
@item --version
709
Print the @command{as} version and exit.
710
 
711
@item -W
712
@itemx --no-warn
713
Suppress warning messages.
714
 
715
@item --fatal-warnings
716
Treat warnings as errors.
717
 
718
@item --warn
719
Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
720
 
721
@item -w
722
Ignored.
723
 
724
@item -x
725
Ignored.
726
 
727
@item -Z
728
Generate an object file even after errors.
729
 
730
@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
731
Standard input, or source files to assemble.
732
 
733
@end table
734
@c man end
735
 
736
@ifset ALPHA
737
 
738
@ifclear man
739
@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
740
for an Alpha processor.
741
@end ifclear
742
 
743
@ifset man
744
@c man begin OPTIONS
745
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
746
processor.
747
@c man end
748
@c man begin INCLUDE
749
@include c-alpha.texi
750
@c ended inside the included file
751
@end ifset
752
 
753
@end ifset
754
 
755
@c man begin OPTIONS
756
@ifset ARC
757
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
758
an ARC processor.
759
 
760
@table @gcctabopt
761
@item -marc[5|6|7|8]
762
This option selects the core processor variant.
763
@item -EB | -EL
764
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
765
@end table
766
@end ifset
767
 
768
@ifset ARM
769
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
770
processor family.
771
 
772
@table @gcctabopt
773
@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
774
Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
775
@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
776
Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
777
@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
778
Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
779
@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
780
Select which floating point ABI is in use.
781
@item -mthumb
782
Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
783
@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
784
Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
785
@item -EB | -EL
786
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
787
@item -mthumb-interwork
788
Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
789
ARM code in mind.
790
@item -k
791
Specify that PIC code has been generated.
792
@end table
793
@end ifset
794
@c man end
795
 
796
@ifset Blackfin
797
 
798
@ifclear man
799
@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
800
configured for the Blackfin processor family.
801
@end ifclear
802
 
803
@ifset man
804
@c man begin OPTIONS
805
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
806
the Blackfin processor family.
807
@c man end
808
@c man begin INCLUDE
809
@include c-bfin.texi
810
@c ended inside the included file
811
@end ifset
812
 
813
@end ifset
814
 
815
@c man begin OPTIONS
816
@ifset CRIS
817
See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
818
@end ifset
819
 
820
@ifset D10V
821
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
822
a D10V processor.
823
@table @gcctabopt
824
@cindex D10V optimization
825
@cindex optimization, D10V
826
@item -O
827
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
828
@end table
829
@end ifset
830
 
831
@ifset D30V
832
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
833
processor.
834
@table @gcctabopt
835
@cindex D30V optimization
836
@cindex optimization, D30V
837
@item -O
838
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
839
 
840
@cindex D30V nops
841
@item -n
842
Warn when nops are generated.
843
 
844
@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
845
@item -N
846
Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
847
@end table
848
@end ifset
849
@c man end
850
 
851 163 khays
@ifset EPIPHANY
852
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
853
Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
854
 
855
@ifclear man
856
@xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
857
configured for an Epiphany processor.
858
@end ifclear
859
 
860
@ifset man
861
@c man begin OPTIONS
862
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
863
an Epiphany processor.
864
@c man end
865
@c man begin INCLUDE
866
@include c-epiphany.texi
867
@c ended inside the included file
868
@end ifset
869
 
870
@end ifset
871
 
872 147 khays
@ifset I80386
873
 
874
@ifclear man
875
@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
876
configured for an i386 processor.
877
@end ifclear
878
 
879
@ifset man
880
@c man begin OPTIONS
881
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
882
an i386 processor.
883
@c man end
884
@c man begin INCLUDE
885
@include c-i386.texi
886
@c ended inside the included file
887
@end ifset
888
 
889
@end ifset
890
 
891
@c man begin OPTIONS
892
@ifset I960
893
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
894
Intel 80960 processor.
895
 
896
@table @gcctabopt
897
@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
898
Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
899
 
900
@item -b
901
Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
902
 
903
@item -no-relax
904
Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
905
error if necessary.
906
 
907
@end table
908
@end ifset
909
 
910
@ifset IP2K
911
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
912
Ubicom IP2K series.
913
 
914
@table @gcctabopt
915
 
916
@item -mip2022ext
917
Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
918
 
919
@item -mip2022
920
Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
921
just the basic IP2022 ones.
922
 
923
@end table
924
@end ifset
925
 
926
@ifset M32C
927
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
928
Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
929
 
930
@table @gcctabopt
931
 
932
@item -m32c
933
Assemble M32C instructions.
934
 
935
@item -m16c
936
Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
937
 
938
@item -relax
939
Enable support for link-time relaxations.
940
 
941
@item -h-tick-hex
942
Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
943
 
944
@end table
945
@end ifset
946
 
947
@ifset M32R
948
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
949
Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
950
 
951
@table @gcctabopt
952
 
953
@item --m32rx
954
Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
955
is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
956
 
957
@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
958
Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
959
encountered.
960
 
961
@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
962
Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
963
encountered.
964
 
965
@end table
966
@end ifset
967
 
968
@ifset M680X0
969
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
970
Motorola 68000 series.
971
 
972
@table @gcctabopt
973
 
974
@item -l
975
Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
976
 
977
@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
978
@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
979
@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
980
Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
981
is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
982
 
983
@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
984
The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
985
The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
986
the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
987
two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
988
coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
989
 
990
@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
991
The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
992
unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
993
 
994
@end table
995
@end ifset
996
 
997
@ifset PDP11
998
 
999
For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1000
see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1001
 
1002
@table @gcctabopt
1003
@item -mpic | -mno-pic
1004
Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
1005
default is @option{-mpic}.
1006
 
1007
@item -mall
1008
@itemx -mall-extensions
1009
Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
1010
 
1011
@item -mno-extensions
1012
Disable all instruction set extensions.
1013
 
1014
@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1015
Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1016
 
1017
@item -m@var{cpu}
1018
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1019
disable all other extensions.
1020
 
1021
@item -m@var{machine}
1022
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1023
model, and disable all other extensions.
1024
@end table
1025
 
1026
@end ifset
1027
 
1028
@ifset PJ
1029
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1030
a picoJava processor.
1031
 
1032
@table @gcctabopt
1033
 
1034
@cindex PJ endianness
1035
@cindex endianness, PJ
1036
@cindex big endian output, PJ
1037
@item -mb
1038
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1039
 
1040
@cindex little endian output, PJ
1041
@item -ml
1042
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1043
 
1044
@end table
1045
@end ifset
1046
 
1047
@ifset M68HC11
1048
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1049
Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1050
 
1051
@table @gcctabopt
1052
 
1053
@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12
1054
Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
1055
defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1056
 
1057
@item -mshort
1058
Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1059
 
1060
@item -mlong
1061
Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1062
 
1063
@item -mshort-double
1064
Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1065
 
1066
@item -mlong-double
1067
Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1068
 
1069
@item --force-long-branches
1070
Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1071
conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1072
sub routine.
1073
 
1074
@item -S | --short-branches
1075
Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1076
when the offset is out of range.
1077
 
1078
@item --strict-direct-mode
1079
Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1080
when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1081
 
1082
@item --print-insn-syntax
1083
Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1084
 
1085
@item --print-opcodes
1086
print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1087
 
1088
@item --generate-example
1089
print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1090
This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1091
 
1092
@end table
1093
@end ifset
1094
 
1095
@ifset SPARC
1096
The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1097
for the SPARC architecture:
1098
 
1099
@table @gcctabopt
1100
@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1101
@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1102
Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1103
 
1104
@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1105
@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1106
 
1107
@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1108
UltraSPARC extensions.
1109
 
1110
@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1111
For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
1112
equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1113
 
1114
@item -bump
1115
Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1116
@end table
1117
@end ifset
1118
 
1119
@ifset TIC54X
1120
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1121
architecture.
1122
 
1123
@table @gcctabopt
1124
@item -mfar-mode
1125
Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
1126
extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1127
@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1128
Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1129
@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1130
Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1131
behaviour in the shell.
1132
@end table
1133
@end ifset
1134
 
1135
@ifset MIPS
1136
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1137
a @sc{mips} processor.
1138
 
1139
@table @gcctabopt
1140
@item -G @var{num}
1141
This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1142
implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
1143
use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
1144
 
1145
@cindex MIPS endianness
1146
@cindex endianness, MIPS
1147
@cindex big endian output, MIPS
1148
@item -EB
1149
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1150
 
1151
@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1152
@item -EL
1153
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1154
 
1155
@cindex MIPS ISA
1156
@item -mips1
1157
@itemx -mips2
1158
@itemx -mips3
1159
@itemx -mips4
1160
@itemx -mips5
1161
@itemx -mips32
1162
@itemx -mips32r2
1163
@itemx -mips64
1164
@itemx -mips64r2
1165
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1166
@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1167
alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1168
@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1169
@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1170
@samp{-mips64r2}
1171
correspond to generic
1172
@samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1173
and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1174
ISA processors, respectively.
1175
 
1176
@item -march=@var{CPU}
1177
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1178
 
1179
@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1180
Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1181
 
1182
@item -mfix7000
1183
@itemx -mno-fix7000
1184
Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1185
of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1186
 
1187
@item -mdebug
1188
@itemx -no-mdebug
1189
Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1190
section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1191
 
1192
@item -mpdr
1193
@itemx -mno-pdr
1194
Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1195
 
1196
@item -mgp32
1197
@itemx -mfp32
1198
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1199
flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1200
all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1201
and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1202
 
1203
@item -mips16
1204
@itemx -no-mips16
1205
Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1206
@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
1207
turns off this option.
1208
 
1209 160 khays
@item -mmicromips
1210
@itemx -mno-micromips
1211
Generate code for the microMIPS processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1212
@code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-micromips}
1213
turns off this option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1214
at the start of the assembly file.
1215
 
1216 147 khays
@item -msmartmips
1217
@itemx -mno-smartmips
1218
Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1219
equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1220
@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1221
 
1222
@item -mips3d
1223
@itemx -no-mips3d
1224
Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1225
This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1226
@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1227
 
1228
@item -mdmx
1229
@itemx -no-mdmx
1230
Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1231
This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1232
@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1233
 
1234
@item -mdsp
1235
@itemx -mno-dsp
1236
Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1237
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1238
@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1239
 
1240
@item -mdspr2
1241
@itemx -mno-dspr2
1242
Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1243
This option implies -mdsp.
1244
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1245
@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1246
 
1247
@item -mmt
1248
@itemx -mno-mt
1249
Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1250
This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1251
@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1252
 
1253 160 khays
@item -mmcu
1254
@itemx -mno-mcu
1255
Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1256
This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1257
@samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1258
 
1259 147 khays
@item --construct-floats
1260
@itemx --no-construct-floats
1261
The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1262
double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1263
value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1264
the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1265
selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1266
 
1267
@cindex emulation
1268
@item --emulation=@var{name}
1269
This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1270
for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1271
between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1272
debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1273
endianness.  The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1274
@samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1275
@samp{mipsbelf}.  The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1276
of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1277
the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1278
in the name.  Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1279
selection in any case.
1280
 
1281
This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1282
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1283
Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1284
@samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1285
the other format, if both are to be available.  For example, the Irix 5
1286
configuration includes support for both.
1287
 
1288
Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1289
fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1290
more processors.
1291
 
1292
@item -nocpp
1293
@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
1294
the native tools.
1295
 
1296
@item --trap
1297
@itemx --no-trap
1298
@itemx --break
1299
@itemx --no-break
1300
Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1301
@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1302
(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1303
@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1304
break exception.
1305
 
1306
@item -n
1307
When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1308
time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1309
@end table
1310
@end ifset
1311
 
1312
@ifset MCORE
1313
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1314
an MCore processor.
1315
 
1316
@table @gcctabopt
1317
@item -jsri2bsr
1318
@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1319
Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
1320
The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1321
 
1322
@item -sifilter
1323
@itemx -nosifilter
1324
Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
1325
The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1326
 
1327
@item -relax
1328
Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1329
 
1330
@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1331
Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
1332
can be assembled.
1333
 
1334
@item -EB
1335
Assemble for a big endian target.
1336
 
1337
@item -EL
1338
Assemble for a little endian target.
1339
 
1340
@end table
1341
@end ifset
1342
 
1343
@ifset MMIX
1344
See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1345
@end ifset
1346
 
1347
@c man end
1348
@ifset PPC
1349
 
1350
@ifclear man
1351
@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1352
for a PowerPC processor.
1353
@end ifclear
1354
 
1355
@ifset man
1356
@c man begin OPTIONS
1357
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1358
PowerPC processor.
1359
@c man end
1360
@c man begin INCLUDE
1361
@include c-ppc.texi
1362
@c ended inside the included file
1363
@end ifset
1364
 
1365
@end ifset
1366
 
1367
@c man begin OPTIONS
1368
@ifset RX
1369
See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1370
@end ifset
1371
 
1372
@ifset S390
1373
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1374
processor family.
1375
 
1376
@table @gcctabopt
1377
@item -m31
1378
@itemx -m64
1379
Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1380
@item -mesa
1381
@item -mzarch
1382
Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1383
Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1384
@item -march=@var{processor}
1385
Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1386
@samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, or @samp{z10}.
1387
@item -mregnames
1388
@itemx -mno-regnames
1389
Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1390
@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1391
Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1392
but evaluates to zero.
1393
@end table
1394
@end ifset
1395
@c man end
1396
 
1397
@ifset TIC6X
1398
 
1399
@ifclear man
1400
@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1401
for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1402
@end ifclear
1403
 
1404
@ifset man
1405
@c man begin OPTIONS
1406
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1407
TMS320C6000 processor.
1408
@c man end
1409
@c man begin INCLUDE
1410
@include c-tic6x.texi
1411
@c ended inside the included file
1412
@end ifset
1413
 
1414
@end ifset
1415
 
1416 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
1417
 
1418
@ifclear man
1419
@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1420
for a TILE-Gx processor.
1421
@end ifclear
1422
 
1423
@ifset man
1424
@c man begin OPTIONS
1425
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1426
processor.
1427
@c man end
1428
@c man begin INCLUDE
1429
@include c-tilegx.texi
1430
@c ended inside the included file
1431
@end ifset
1432
 
1433
@end ifset
1434
 
1435 147 khays
@ifset XTENSA
1436
 
1437
@ifclear man
1438
@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1439
for an Xtensa processor.
1440
@end ifclear
1441
 
1442
@ifset man
1443
@c man begin OPTIONS
1444
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1445
Xtensa processor.
1446
@c man end
1447
@c man begin INCLUDE
1448
@include c-xtensa.texi
1449
@c ended inside the included file
1450
@end ifset
1451
 
1452
@end ifset
1453
 
1454
@c man begin OPTIONS
1455
 
1456
@ifset Z80
1457
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1458
a Z80 family processor.
1459
@table @gcctabopt
1460
@item -z80
1461
Assemble for Z80 processor.
1462
@item -r800
1463
Assemble for R800 processor.
1464
@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1465
@itemx -Wnud
1466
Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1467
@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
1468
@itemx -Wnup
1469
Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1470
@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
1471
@itemx -Wud
1472
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1473
@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
1474
@itemx -Wup
1475
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1476
@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1477
@itemx -Fud
1478
Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1479
@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
1480
@itemx -Fup
1481
Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1482
@end table
1483
@end ifset
1484
 
1485
@c man end
1486
 
1487
@menu
1488
* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
1489
* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
1490
* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
1491
* Command Line::                Command Line
1492
* Input Files::                 Input Files
1493
* Object::                      Output (Object) File
1494
* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
1495
@end menu
1496
 
1497
@node Manual
1498
@section Structure of this Manual
1499
 
1500
@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1501
This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1502
@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1503
notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1504
@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1505
 
1506
@ifclear GENERIC
1507
We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1508
configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1509
@end ifclear
1510
@ifset GENERIC
1511
This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1512
various flavors of the assembler.
1513
@end ifset
1514
 
1515
@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1516
On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1517
to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1518
In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1519
architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1520
mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1521
particular architecture.
1522
@ifset GENERIC
1523
You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1524
machine architecture manual for this information.
1525
@end ifset
1526
@ifclear GENERIC
1527
@ifset H8/300
1528
For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1529
Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1530
Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1531
@end ifset
1532
@ifset SH
1533
For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1534
see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1535
@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1536
@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1537
@end ifset
1538
@ifset Z8000
1539
For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1540
@end ifset
1541
@end ifclear
1542
 
1543
@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1544
@ignore
1545
Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1546
the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1547
Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1548
computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1549
once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1550
qualification.
1551
 
1552
@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1553
human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1554
computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
1555
@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1556
@end ignore
1557
 
1558
@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1559
@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
1560
@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1561
@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1562
@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1563
@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1564
@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1565
@c directives).
1566
 
1567
@node GNU Assembler
1568
@section The GNU Assembler
1569
 
1570
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1571
 
1572
@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1573
@ifclear GENERIC
1574
This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1575
configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1576
@end ifclear
1577
If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1578
should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1579
architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
1580
including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1581
@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1582
 
1583
@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1584
@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1585
@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1586
@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1587
assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1588
machine would assemble.
1589
@ifset VAX
1590
Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1591
@end ifset
1592
@ifset M680X0
1593
@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1594
@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1595
This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1596
assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1597
incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1598
@end ifset
1599
 
1600
@c man end
1601
 
1602
Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1603
program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
1604
@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1605
 
1606
@node Object Formats
1607
@section Object File Formats
1608
 
1609
@cindex object file format
1610
The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1611
object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
1612
write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1613
are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
1614
Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1615
@ifclear GENERIC
1616
@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1617
For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1618
@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1619
@end ifclear
1620
@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1621
@ifset I960
1622
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1623
@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1624
@end ifset
1625
@ifset HPPA
1626
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1627
SOM or ELF format object files.
1628
@end ifset
1629
@end ifclear
1630
 
1631
@node Command Line
1632
@section Command Line
1633
 
1634
@cindex command line conventions
1635
 
1636
After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1637
options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
1638
before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
1639
significant.
1640
 
1641
@cindex standard input, as input file
1642
@kindex --
1643
@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1644
explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1645
 
1646
@cindex options, command line
1647
Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1648
hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
1649
@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
1650
option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1651
the letter is important.   All options are optional.
1652
 
1653
Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
1654
name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1655
with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1656
standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
1657
 
1658
@smallexample
1659
@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1660
@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1661
@end smallexample
1662
 
1663
@node Input Files
1664
@section Input Files
1665
 
1666
@cindex input
1667
@cindex source program
1668
@cindex files, input
1669
We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1670
describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
1671
be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1672
doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1673
 
1674
@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1675
@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
1676
The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1677
order specified.
1678
 
1679
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1680
Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1681
program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
1682
(The standard input is also a file.)
1683
 
1684
You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1685
names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
1686
command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1687
is taken to be an input file name.
1688
 
1689
If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1690
from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
1691
may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1692
to assemble.
1693
 
1694
Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1695
in your command line.
1696
 
1697
If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1698
file.
1699
 
1700
@c man end
1701
 
1702
@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1703
 
1704
@cindex input file linenumbers
1705
@cindex line numbers, in input files
1706
There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1707
either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
1708
number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1709
``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1710
 
1711
@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1712
to @command{@value{AS}}.
1713
 
1714
@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1715
directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
1716
error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1717
is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1718
@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
1719
@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1720
 
1721
@node Object
1722
@section Output (Object) File
1723
 
1724
@cindex object file
1725
@cindex output file
1726
@kindex a.out
1727
@kindex .o
1728
Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1729
your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
1730
is the object file.  Its default name is
1731
@ifclear BOUT
1732
@code{a.out}.
1733
@end ifclear
1734
@ifset BOUT
1735
@ifset GENERIC
1736
@code{a.out}, or
1737
@end ifset
1738
@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1739
@end ifset
1740
You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
1741
object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
1742
reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1743
directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
1744
possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1745
 
1746
@cindex linker
1747
@kindex ld
1748
The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
1749
assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1750
the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1751
information for the debugger.
1752
 
1753
@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1754
@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1755
 
1756
@node Errors
1757
@section Error and Warning Messages
1758
 
1759
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1760
 
1761
@cindex error messages
1762
@cindex warning messages
1763
@cindex messages from assembler
1764
@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1765
file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
1766
runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
1767
that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1768
grave problem that stops the assembly.
1769
 
1770
@c man end
1771
 
1772
@cindex format of warning messages
1773
Warning messages have the format
1774
 
1775
@smallexample
1776
file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1777
@end smallexample
1778
 
1779
@noindent
1780
@cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1781
(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If a logical file name has been given
1782
(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1783
the current input file is used.  If a logical line number was given
1784
@ifset GENERIC
1785
(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1786
@end ifset
1787
then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1788
otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed.  The
1789
message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1790
tradition).
1791
 
1792
@cindex format of error messages
1793
Error messages have the format
1794
@smallexample
1795
file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1796
@end smallexample
1797
The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1798
messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1799
because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1800
 
1801
@node Invoking
1802
@chapter Command-Line Options
1803
 
1804
@cindex options, all versions of assembler
1805
This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1806
versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1807
for options specific
1808
@ifclear GENERIC
1809
to the @value{TARGET} target.
1810
@end ifclear
1811
@ifset GENERIC
1812
to particular machine architectures.
1813
@end ifset
1814
 
1815
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1816
 
1817
If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1818
you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1819
The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1820
by commas.  For example:
1821
 
1822
@smallexample
1823
gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1824
@end smallexample
1825
 
1826
@noindent
1827
This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1828
standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1829
local symbols in the symbol table).
1830
 
1831
Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1832
command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1833
(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1834
precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1835
assembler.)
1836
 
1837
@c man end
1838
 
1839
@menu
1840
* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1841
* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1842
* D::             -D for compatibility
1843
* f::             -f to work faster
1844
* I::             -I for .include search path
1845
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1846
* K::             -K for compatibility
1847
@end ifclear
1848
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1849
* K::             -K for difference tables
1850
@end ifset
1851
 
1852
* L::             -L to retain local symbols
1853
* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1854
* M::             -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1855
* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
1856
* o::             -o to name the object file
1857
* R::             -R to join data and text sections
1858
* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1859
* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1860
* v::             -v to announce version
1861
* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1862
* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
1863
@end menu
1864
 
1865
@node a
1866
@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1867
 
1868
@kindex -a
1869
@kindex -ac
1870
@kindex -ad
1871
@kindex -ag
1872
@kindex -ah
1873
@kindex -al
1874
@kindex -an
1875
@kindex -as
1876
@cindex listings, enabling
1877
@cindex assembly listings, enabling
1878
 
1879
These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
1880
@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1881
You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1882
@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1883
@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1884
@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1885
High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1886
@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1887
also.
1888
 
1889
Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1890
information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1891
 
1892
Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
1893
which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1894
other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1895
omitted from the listing.
1896
 
1897
Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1898
listing.
1899
 
1900
Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1901
listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1902
@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1903
@code{.sbttl}.
1904
The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1905
If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1906
listing-control directives have no effect.
1907
 
1908
The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1909
@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1910
 
1911
Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1912
because it
1913
is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1914
is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1915
directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1916
stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
1917
memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1918
 
1919
@node alternate
1920
@section @option{--alternate}
1921
 
1922
@kindex --alternate
1923
Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1924
 
1925
@node D
1926
@section @option{-D}
1927
 
1928
@kindex -D
1929
This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1930
likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1931
@command{@value{AS}}.
1932
 
1933
@node f
1934
@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1935
 
1936
@kindex -f
1937
@cindex trusted compiler
1938
@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1939
@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1940
(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1941
and comment preprocessing on
1942
the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
1943
,Preprocessing}.
1944
 
1945
@quotation
1946
@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1947
preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1948
not work correctly.
1949
@end quotation
1950
 
1951
@node I
1952
@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1953
 
1954
@kindex -I @var{path}
1955
@cindex paths for @code{.include}
1956
@cindex search path for @code{.include}
1957
@cindex @code{include} directive search path
1958
Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1959
@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1960
directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
1961
many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
1962
working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1963
searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1964
specified (left to right) on the command line.
1965
 
1966
@node K
1967
@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1968
 
1969
@kindex -K
1970
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1971
On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
1972
permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
1973
where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
1974
generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
1975
family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
1976
alteration on other platforms.
1977
@end ifclear
1978
 
1979
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1980
@cindex difference tables, warning
1981
@cindex warning for altered difference tables
1982
@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
1983
form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
1984
You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
1985
is done.
1986
@end ifset
1987
 
1988
@node L
1989
@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
1990
 
1991
@kindex -L
1992
@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
1993
Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
1994
@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
1995
called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
1996
such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
1997
programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
1998
notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
1999
such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2000
 
2001
This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2002
in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2003
@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2004
 
2005
@node listing
2006
@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2007
 
2008
The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2009
@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2010
hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2011
them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
2012
directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2013
@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2014
@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2015
@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2016
 
2017
@table @gcctabopt
2018
@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2019
@kindex --listing-lhs-width
2020
@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2021
Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
2022
dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2023
 
2024
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2025
@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2026
@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2027
Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2028
a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2029
the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
2030
switch is used the default is to one.
2031
 
2032
@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2033
@kindex --listing-rhs-width
2034
@cindex Width of source line output
2035
Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2036
alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
2037
source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2038
 
2039
@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2040
@kindex --listing-cont-lines
2041
@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2042
Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2043
displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
2044
@end table
2045
 
2046
@node M
2047
@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2048
 
2049
@kindex -M
2050
@cindex MRI compatibility mode
2051
The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
2052
changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2053
compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2054
configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
2055
MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2056
information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2057
arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
2058
assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2059
 
2060
The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2061
depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2062
file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2063
individually.  These are:
2064
 
2065
@itemize @bullet
2066
@item global symbols in common section
2067
 
2068
The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2069
Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
2070
common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
2071
symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2072
symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2073
 
2074
@item complex relocations
2075
 
2076
The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2077
relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
2078
are not support by other object file formats.
2079
 
2080
@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2081
 
2082
The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2083
This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
2084
instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2085
script.
2086
 
2087
@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2088
 
2089
The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2090
name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
2091
 
2092
@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2093
 
2094
The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2095
address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2096
which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
2097
not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
2098
assigned within a linker script.
2099
@end itemize
2100
 
2101
There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2102
@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2103
seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2104
 
2105
@itemize @bullet
2106
 
2107
@item EBCDIC strings
2108
 
2109
EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2110
 
2111
@item packed binary coded decimal
2112
 
2113
Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
2114
and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2115
 
2116
@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2117
 
2118
The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2119
 
2120
@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2121
 
2122
The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2123
 
2124
@item @code{OPT} branch control options
2125
 
2126
The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2127
@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2128
relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2129
these options serve no purpose.
2130
 
2131
@item @code{OPT} list control options
2132
 
2133
The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2134
@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2135
@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2136
 
2137
@item other @code{OPT} options
2138
 
2139
The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2140
@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2141
 
2142
@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2143
 
2144
The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2145
@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2146
 
2147
@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2148
 
2149
The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2150
 
2151
@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2152
 
2153
The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2154
 
2155
@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2156
 
2157
The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2158
 
2159
@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2160
 
2161
The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2162
 
2163
@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2164
 
2165
The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2166
 
2167
@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2168
 
2169
The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2170
 
2171
@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2172
 
2173
The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2174
 
2175
@end itemize
2176
 
2177
@node MD
2178
@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2179
 
2180
@kindex --MD
2181
@cindex dependency tracking
2182
@cindex make rules
2183
 
2184
@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
2185
file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2186
dependencies of the main source file.
2187
 
2188
The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2189
 
2190
This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2191
 
2192
@node o
2193
@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2194
 
2195
@kindex -o
2196
@cindex naming object file
2197
@cindex object file name
2198
There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
2199
default it has the name
2200
@ifset GENERIC
2201
@ifset I960
2202
@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2203
@end ifset
2204
@ifclear I960
2205
@file{a.out}.
2206
@end ifclear
2207
@end ifset
2208
@ifclear GENERIC
2209
@ifset I960
2210
@file{b.out}.
2211
@end ifset
2212
@ifclear I960
2213
@file{a.out}.
2214
@end ifclear
2215
@end ifclear
2216
You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2217
object file a different name.
2218
 
2219
Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2220
existing file of the same name.
2221
 
2222
@node R
2223
@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2224
 
2225
@kindex -R
2226
@cindex data and text sections, joining
2227
@cindex text and data sections, joining
2228
@cindex joining text and data sections
2229
@cindex merging text and data sections
2230
@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2231
data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
2232
the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
2233
section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
2234
your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2235
appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2236
 
2237
When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2238
address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2239
data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2240
older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2241
 
2242
@ifset COFF-ELF
2243
When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2244
this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2245
@samp{.data}.
2246
@end ifset
2247
 
2248
@ifset HPPA
2249
@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
2250
@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2251
@end ifset
2252
 
2253
@node statistics
2254
@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2255
 
2256
@kindex --statistics
2257
@cindex statistics, about assembly
2258
@cindex time, total for assembly
2259
@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2260
Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2261
@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2262
(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2263
seconds).
2264
 
2265
@node traditional-format
2266
@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2267
 
2268
@kindex --traditional-format
2269
For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2270
from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
2271
@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2272
 
2273
For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2274
@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2275
 
2276
@node v
2277
@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2278
 
2279
@kindex -v
2280
@kindex -version
2281
@cindex assembler version
2282
@cindex version of assembler
2283
You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2284
option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2285
command line.
2286
 
2287
@node W
2288
@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2289
 
2290
@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2291
assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
2292
cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2293
made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2294
 
2295
@kindex -W
2296
@kindex --no-warn
2297
@cindex suppressing warnings
2298
@cindex warnings, suppressing
2299
If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2300
This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2301
how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
2302
are still reported.
2303
 
2304
@kindex --fatal-warnings
2305
@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2306
@cindex warnings, causing error
2307
If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2308
files that generate warnings to be in error.
2309
 
2310
@kindex --warn
2311
@cindex warnings, switching on
2312
You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2313
causes warnings to be output as usual.
2314
 
2315
@node Z
2316
@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2317
@cindex object file, after errors
2318
@cindex errors, continuing after
2319
After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
2320
some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2321
@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2322
option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2323
writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2324
errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2325
 
2326
@node Syntax
2327
@chapter Syntax
2328
 
2329
@cindex machine-independent syntax
2330
@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2331
This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2332
source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2333
assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2334
@ifclear VAX
2335
assembler.
2336
@end ifclear
2337
@ifset VAX
2338
assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2339
@end ifset
2340
 
2341
@menu
2342
* Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
2343
* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
2344
* Comments::                    Comments
2345
* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
2346
* Statements::                  Statements
2347
* Constants::                   Constants
2348
@end menu
2349
 
2350
@node Preprocessing
2351
@section Preprocessing
2352
 
2353
@cindex preprocessing
2354
The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2355
@itemize @bullet
2356
@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2357
@item
2358
adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
2359
the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2360
a single space.
2361
 
2362
@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2363
@item
2364
removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2365
appropriate number of newlines.
2366
 
2367
@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2368
@item
2369
converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2370
@end itemize
2371
 
2372
It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2373
anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
2374
do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2375
(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2376
to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2377
@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2378
Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2379
 
2380
Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2381
cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2382
preprocessed.
2383
 
2384
@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2385
@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2386
@kindex #NO_APP
2387
@kindex #APP
2388
If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2389
@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2390
Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2391
specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2392
text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2393
@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
2394
@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2395
and whitespace.
2396
 
2397
@node Whitespace
2398
@section Whitespace
2399
 
2400
@cindex whitespace
2401
@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2402
Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2403
people to read.  Unless within character constants
2404
(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2405
as exactly one space.
2406
 
2407
@node Comments
2408
@section Comments
2409
 
2410
@cindex comments
2411
There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
2412
cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2413
 
2414
Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2415
This means you may not nest these comments.
2416
 
2417
@smallexample
2418
/*
2419
  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2420
  is to use this sort of comment.
2421
*/
2422
 
2423
/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2424
@end smallexample
2425
 
2426
@cindex line comment character
2427
Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2428
considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
2429
specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
2430
line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2431
line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2432
comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2433
upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
2434
@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2435
 
2436
If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2437
special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2438
to specify logical line numbers:
2439
 
2440
@kindex #
2441
@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2442
@cindex logical line numbers
2443
To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2444
special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2445
expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2446
line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2447
new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2448
 
2449
If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2450
the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
2451
 
2452
@smallexample
2453
                          # This is an ordinary comment.
2454
# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
2455
                          # This is logical line # 36.
2456
@end smallexample
2457
This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2458
of @command{@value{AS}}.
2459
 
2460
@node Symbol Intro
2461
@section Symbols
2462
 
2463
@cindex characters used in symbols
2464
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2465
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2466
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2467
@samp{_.$}.
2468
@end ifclear
2469
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2470
@ifclear GENERIC
2471
@ifset H8
2472
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2473
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2474
@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2475
symbol names.)
2476
@end ifset
2477
@end ifclear
2478
@end ifset
2479
@ifset GENERIC
2480
On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2481
are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2482
@end ifset
2483
No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
2484
There is no length limit: all characters are significant.  Symbols are
2485
delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2486
(since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is
2487
not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
2488
@cindex length of symbols
2489
 
2490
@node Statements
2491
@section Statements
2492
 
2493
@cindex statements, structure of
2494
@cindex line separator character
2495
@cindex statement separator character
2496
 
2497
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2498
@dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
2499
specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2500
target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
2501
The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2502
preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2503
exception: they do not end statements.
2504
 
2505
@cindex newline, required at file end
2506
@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2507
It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
2508
character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2509
 
2510
An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
2511
 
2512
@cindex instructions and directives
2513
@cindex directives and instructions
2514
@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2515
@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
2516
@c 13feb91.
2517
A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2518
key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
2519
symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
2520
symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2521
directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
2522
a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2523
assembles into a machine language instruction.
2524
@ifset GENERIC
2525
Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2526
recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
2527
represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2528
language.@refill
2529
@end ifset
2530
 
2531
@cindex @code{:} (label)
2532
@cindex label (@code{:})
2533
A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2534
Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2535
have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2536
 
2537
@ifset HPPA
2538
For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2539
the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
2540
only one label may be defined on each line.
2541
@end ifset
2542
 
2543
@smallexample
2544
label:     .directive    followed by something
2545
another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
2546
           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2547
@end smallexample
2548
 
2549
@node Constants
2550
@section Constants
2551
 
2552
@cindex constants
2553
A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2554
inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
2555
@smallexample
2556
@group
2557
.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2558
.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
2559
.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2560
.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2561
95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
2562
@end group
2563
@end smallexample
2564
 
2565
@menu
2566
* Characters::                  Character Constants
2567
* Numbers::                     Number Constants
2568
@end menu
2569
 
2570
@node Characters
2571
@subsection Character Constants
2572
 
2573
@cindex character constants
2574
@cindex constants, character
2575
There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
2576
for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2577
numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
2578
@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2579
used in arithmetic expressions.
2580
 
2581
@menu
2582
* Strings::                     Strings
2583
* Chars::                       Characters
2584
@end menu
2585
 
2586
@node Strings
2587
@subsubsection Strings
2588
 
2589
@cindex string constants
2590
@cindex constants, string
2591
A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
2592
double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
2593
into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2594
a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
2595
one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2596
@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2597
(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2598
escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
2599
 
2600
@cindex escape codes, character
2601
@cindex character escape codes
2602
@table @kbd
2603
@c      @item \a
2604
@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2605
@c
2606
@cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2607
@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2608
@item \b
2609
Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2610
 
2611
@c      @item \e
2612
@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2613
@c
2614
@cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2615
@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2616
@item \f
2617
Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2618
 
2619
@cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2620
@cindex newline (@code{\n})
2621
@item \n
2622
Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2623
 
2624
@c      @item \p
2625
@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2626
@c
2627
@cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2628
@cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2629
@item \r
2630
Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2631
 
2632
@c      @item \s
2633
@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
2634
@c      other assemblers.
2635
@c
2636
@cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2637
@cindex tab (@code{\t})
2638
@item \t
2639
Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2640
 
2641
@c      @item \v
2642
@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2643
@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2644
@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2645
@c
2646
@cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2647
@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2648
@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2649
An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2650
For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2651
for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2652
 
2653
@cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2654
@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2655
@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2656
A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
2657
lower case @code{x} works.
2658
 
2659
@cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2660
@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2661
@item \\
2662
Represents one @samp{\} character.
2663
 
2664
@c      @item \'
2665
@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2666
@c      This is needed in single character literals
2667
@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2668
@c      a @samp{'}.
2669
@c
2670
@cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2671
@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2672
@item \"
2673
Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
2674
this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2675
 
2676
@item \ @var{anything-else}
2677
Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2678
assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
2679
you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2680
interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2681
other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2682
code and warns you of the fact.
2683
@end table
2684
 
2685
Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2686
varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
2687
the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2688
compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2689
sequence.
2690
 
2691
@node Chars
2692
@subsubsection Characters
2693
 
2694
@cindex single character constant
2695
@cindex character, single
2696
@cindex constant, single character
2697
A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2698
followed by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as
2699
to strings.  So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2700
must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2701
@code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2702
grave accent.  A newline
2703
@ifclear GENERIC
2704
@ifclear abnormal-separator
2705
(or semicolon @samp{;})
2706
@end ifclear
2707
@ifset abnormal-separator
2708
@ifset H8
2709
(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2710
Renesas SH)
2711
@end ifset
2712
@end ifset
2713
@end ifclear
2714
immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2715
and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
2716
constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2717
that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2718
@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2719
 
2720
@node Numbers
2721
@subsection Number Constants
2722
 
2723
@cindex constants, number
2724
@cindex number constants
2725
@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2726
are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2727
would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
2728
integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
2729
are floating point numbers, described below.
2730
 
2731
@menu
2732
* Integers::                    Integers
2733
* Bignums::                     Bignums
2734
* Flonums::                     Flonums
2735
@ifclear GENERIC
2736
@ifset I960
2737
* Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
2738
@end ifset
2739
@end ifclear
2740
@end menu
2741
 
2742
@node Integers
2743
@subsubsection Integers
2744
@cindex integers
2745
@cindex constants, integer
2746
 
2747
@cindex binary integers
2748
@cindex integers, binary
2749
A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2750
the binary digits @samp{01}.
2751
 
2752
@cindex octal integers
2753
@cindex integers, octal
2754
An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2755
digits (@samp{01234567}).
2756
 
2757
@cindex decimal integers
2758
@cindex integers, decimal
2759
A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2760
more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2761
 
2762
@cindex hexadecimal integers
2763
@cindex integers, hexadecimal
2764
A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2765
more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2766
 
2767
Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
2768
the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2769
(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2770
 
2771
@node Bignums
2772
@subsubsection Bignums
2773
 
2774
@cindex bignums
2775
@cindex constants, bignum
2776
A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2777
except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2778
represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
2779
integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2780
 
2781
@node Flonums
2782
@subsubsection Flonums
2783
@cindex flonums
2784
@cindex floating point numbers
2785
@cindex constants, floating point
2786
 
2787
@cindex precision, floating point
2788
A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
2789
indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2790
@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2791
sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
2792
to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2793
portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2794
 
2795
A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2796
@itemize @bullet
2797
@item
2798
The digit @samp{0}.
2799
@ifset HPPA
2800
(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2801
@end ifset
2802
 
2803
@item
2804
A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2805
@ifset GENERIC
2806
@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
2807
@ignore
2808
@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2809
(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
2810
4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2811
@end ignore
2812
 
2813
On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2814
and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2815
one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2816
 
2817
On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2818
(in upper or lower case).
2819
 
2820
On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2821
one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2822
 
2823
On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2824
@end ifset
2825
@ifclear GENERIC
2826
@ifset ARC
2827
One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2828
@end ifset
2829
@ifset H8
2830
One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2831
@end ifset
2832
@ifset HPPA
2833
The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2834
@end ifset
2835
@ifset I960
2836
One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2837
@end ifset
2838
@end ifclear
2839
 
2840
@item
2841
An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2842
 
2843
@item
2844
An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2845
 
2846
@item
2847
An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2848
or more decimal digits.
2849
 
2850
@item
2851
An optional exponent, consisting of:
2852
 
2853
@itemize @bullet
2854
@item
2855
An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2856
@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2857
@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2858
@item
2859
Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2860
@item
2861
One or more decimal digits.
2862
@end itemize
2863
 
2864
@end itemize
2865
 
2866
At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2867
present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2868
 
2869
@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
2870
independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2871
@command{@value{AS}}.
2872
 
2873
@ifclear GENERIC
2874
@ifset I960
2875
@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2876
@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2877
@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2878
@node Bit Fields
2879
@subsubsection Bit Fields
2880
 
2881
@cindex bit fields
2882
@cindex constants, bit field
2883
You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2884
Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2885
@example
2886
@var{mask}:@var{value}
2887
@end example
2888
@noindent
2889
@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2890
@var{value}.
2891
 
2892
The resulting number is then packed
2893
@ifset GENERIC
2894
@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2895
(in host-dependent byte order)
2896
@end ifset
2897
into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2898
bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2899
requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2900
more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2901
least significant digits.@refill
2902
 
2903
The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2904
@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2905
@end ifset
2906
@end ifclear
2907
 
2908
@node Sections
2909
@chapter Sections and Relocation
2910
@cindex sections
2911
@cindex relocation
2912
 
2913
@menu
2914
* Secs Background::             Background
2915
* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
2916
* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
2917
* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
2918
* bss::                         bss Section
2919
@end menu
2920
 
2921
@node Secs Background
2922
@section Background
2923
 
2924
Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2925
``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2926
For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2927
 
2928
@cindex linker, and assembler
2929
@cindex assembler, and linker
2930
The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2931
combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
2932
emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2933
@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2934
different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
2935
oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2936
sections.
2937
 
2938
@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2939
addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2940
units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2941
within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
2942
run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
2943
the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2944
the proper run-time addresses.
2945
@ifset H8
2946
For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2947
@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2948
ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2949
@end ifset
2950
 
2951
@cindex standard assembler sections
2952
An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2953
of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2954
@dfn{bss} sections.
2955
 
2956
@ifset COFF-ELF
2957
@ifset GENERIC
2958
When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2959
@end ifset
2960
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2961
using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2962
If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2963
or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2964
@end ifset
2965
 
2966
@ifset HPPA
2967
@ifset GENERIC
2968
When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2969
@end ifset
2970
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2971
specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
2972
@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
2973
(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
2974
assembler directives.
2975
 
2976
@ifset SOM
2977
Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
2978
text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
2979
is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
2980
BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
2981
@end ifset
2982
@end ifset
2983
 
2984
Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
2985
data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
2986
 
2987
@ifset HPPA
2988
When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
2989
section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
2990
@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
2991
@end ifset
2992
 
2993
To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
2994
relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
2995
object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
2996
@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
2997
file is mentioned:
2998
@itemize @bullet
2999
@item
3000
Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3001
an address?
3002
@item
3003
How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3004
@item
3005
Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
3006
@display
3007
(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3008
@end display
3009
@item
3010
Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3011
@end itemize
3012
 
3013
@cindex addresses, format of
3014
@cindex section-relative addressing
3015
In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3016
@display
3017
(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3018
@end display
3019
@noindent
3020
Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3021
nature.
3022
@ifset SOM
3023
(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3024
symbol-relative instead.)
3025
@end ifset
3026
 
3027
In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3028
@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3029
 
3030
Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3031
@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3032
addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
3033
@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3034
@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3035
data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3036
their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3037
part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3038
address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3039
 
3040
The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
3041
address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3042
rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3043
Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3044
address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
3045
common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3046
time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3047
 
3048
By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3049
the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3050
sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
3051
customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3052
the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
3053
data and bss sections.
3054
 
3055
Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3056
use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3057
 
3058
@node Ld Sections
3059
@section Linker Sections
3060
@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3061
 
3062
@table @strong
3063
 
3064
@ifset COFF-ELF
3065
@cindex named sections
3066
@cindex sections, named
3067
@item named sections
3068
@end ifset
3069
@ifset aout-bout
3070
@cindex text section
3071
@cindex data section
3072
@itemx text section
3073
@itemx data section
3074
@end ifset
3075
These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3076
separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
3077
true of another.
3078
@c @ifset aout-bout
3079
When the program is running, however, it is
3080
customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
3081
text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3082
instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
3083
program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3084
in the data section.
3085
@c @end ifset
3086
 
3087
@cindex bss section
3088
@item bss section
3089
This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
3090
is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
3091
each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3092
out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3093
bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
3094
those explicit zeros from object files.
3095
 
3096
@cindex absolute section
3097
@item absolute section
3098
Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3099
This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3100
not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
3101
addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3102
 
3103
@cindex undefined section
3104
@item undefined section
3105
This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3106
the preceding sections.
3107
@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3108
@end table
3109
 
3110
@cindex relocation example
3111
An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3112
@ifset COFF-ELF
3113
The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3114
@end ifset
3115
Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3116
 
3117
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3118
@ifnottex
3119
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3120
@smallexample
3121
                      +-----+----+--+
3122
partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
3123
                      +-----+----+--+
3124
 
3125
                      text   data bss
3126
                      seg.   seg. seg.
3127
 
3128
                      +---+---+---+
3129
partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
3130
                      +---+---+---+
3131
 
3132
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3133
linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
3134
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3135
 
3136
    addresses:        0 @dots{}
3137
@end smallexample
3138
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3139
@end ifnottex
3140
@need 5000
3141
@tex
3142
\bigskip
3143
\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3144
\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3145
\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3146
 
3147
\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3148
\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3149
\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3150
 
3151
\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3152
\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3153
\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3154
ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3155
DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3156
 
3157
\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3158
\line{0\dots\hfil}
3159
 
3160
@end tex
3161
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3162
 
3163
@node As Sections
3164
@section Assembler Internal Sections
3165
 
3166
@cindex internal assembler sections
3167
@cindex sections in messages, internal
3168
These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
3169
have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
3170
sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3171
warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3172
meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
3173
value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3174
section-relative address.
3175
 
3176
@table @b
3177
@cindex assembler internal logic error
3178
@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3179
An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
3180
bug in the assembler.
3181
 
3182
@cindex expr (internal section)
3183
@item expr section
3184
The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3185
symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3186
it in the expr section.
3187
@c FIXME item debug
3188
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3189
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3190
@c FIXME item register
3191
@end table
3192
 
3193
@node Sub-Sections
3194
@section Sub-Sections
3195
 
3196
@cindex numbered subsections
3197
@cindex grouping data
3198
@ifset aout-bout
3199
Assembled bytes
3200
@ifset COFF-ELF
3201
conventionally
3202
@end ifset
3203
fall into two sections: text and data.
3204
@end ifset
3205
You may have separate groups of
3206
@ifset GENERIC
3207
data in named sections
3208
@end ifset
3209
@ifclear GENERIC
3210
@ifclear aout-bout
3211
data in named sections
3212
@end ifclear
3213
@ifset aout-bout
3214
text or data
3215
@end ifset
3216
@end ifclear
3217
that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3218
are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3219
use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
3220
numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
3221
same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3222
subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3223
section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3224
assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3225
section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3226
constants being output.
3227
 
3228
Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
3229
goes in subsection number zero.
3230
 
3231
@ifset GENERIC
3232
Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3233
(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3234
of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3235
@end ifset
3236
@ifclear GENERIC
3237
@ifset H8
3238
On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3239
boundary (two bytes).
3240
The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3241
@end ifset
3242
@ifset I960
3243
@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3244
@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3245
@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3246
@c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
3247
@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3248
@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3249
@end ifset
3250
@end ifclear
3251
 
3252
Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3253
to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3254
The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3255
other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3256
They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3257
data subsections as a data section.
3258
 
3259
To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3260
into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3261
@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3262
@ifset COFF
3263
@ifset GENERIC
3264
When generating COFF output, you
3265
@end ifset
3266
@ifclear GENERIC
3267
You
3268
@end ifclear
3269
can also use an extra subsection
3270
argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3271
@var{expression}}.
3272
@end ifset
3273
@ifset ELF
3274
@ifset GENERIC
3275
When generating ELF output, you
3276
@end ifset
3277
@ifclear GENERIC
3278
You
3279
@end ifclear
3280
can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3281
to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3282
@end ifset
3283
@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3284
(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3285
is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
3286
begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
3287
@smallexample
3288
.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3289
.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3290
.text 1
3291
.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3292
.data 0
3293
.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3294
.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3295
.text 0
3296
.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3297
.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3298
@end smallexample
3299
 
3300
Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3301
assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
3302
restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3303
counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3304
@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3305
current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
3306
assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3307
 
3308
@node bss
3309
@section bss Section
3310
 
3311
@cindex bss section
3312
@cindex common variable storage
3313
The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3314
You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3315
not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
3316
your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3317
section are zeroed bytes.
3318
 
3319
The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3320
@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3321
 
3322
The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3323
another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3324
 
3325
@ifset GENERIC
3326
When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3327
COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3328
see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
3329
section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3330
@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3331
@end ifset
3332
 
3333
@node Symbols
3334
@chapter Symbols
3335
 
3336
@cindex symbols
3337
Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3338
things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3339
to debug.
3340
 
3341
@quotation
3342
@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3343
@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3344
the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
3345
@end quotation
3346
 
3347
@menu
3348
* Labels::                      Labels
3349
* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
3350
* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
3351
* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
3352
* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
3353
@end menu
3354
 
3355
@node Labels
3356
@section Labels
3357
 
3358
@cindex labels
3359
A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3360
@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
3361
active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3362
operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3363
different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3364
definitions.
3365
 
3366
@ifset HPPA
3367
On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3368
colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
3369
a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3370
provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3371
@end ifset
3372
 
3373
@node Setting Symbols
3374
@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3375
 
3376
@cindex assigning values to symbols
3377
@cindex symbol values, assigning
3378
A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3379
by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3380
(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3381
directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
3382
equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3383
@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3384
 
3385
@ifset Blackfin
3386
Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3387
@end ifset
3388
 
3389
@node Symbol Names
3390
@section Symbol Names
3391
 
3392
@cindex symbol names
3393
@cindex names, symbol
3394
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3395
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
3396
machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3397
noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
3398
string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3399
particular target machine), and underscores.
3400
@end ifclear
3401
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3402
@ifset H8
3403
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
3404
Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
3405
character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3406
on the H8/300), and underscores.
3407
@end ifset
3408
@end ifset
3409
 
3410
Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3411
than @code{Foo}.
3412
 
3413
Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
3414
refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
3415
in a program.
3416
 
3417
@subheading Local Symbol Names
3418
 
3419
@cindex local symbol names
3420
@cindex symbol names, local
3421
A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3422
By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3423
@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3424
set of local label prefixes.
3425
@ifset HPPA
3426
On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3427
@end ifset
3428
 
3429
Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3430
normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3431
You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3432
@option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3433
 
3434
@subheading Local Labels
3435
 
3436
@cindex local labels
3437
@cindex temporary symbol names
3438
@cindex symbol names, temporary
3439
Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3440
They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3441
the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3442
To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3443
represents any positive integer).  To refer to the most recent previous
3444
definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3445
you defined the label.  To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3446
@samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3447
for ``forwards''.
3448
 
3449
There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3450
too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3451
the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3452
defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3453
definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
3454
noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3455
implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3456
 
3457
Here is an example:
3458
 
3459
@smallexample
3460
1:        branch 1f
3461
2:        branch 1b
3462
1:        branch 2f
3463
2:        branch 1b
3464
@end smallexample
3465
 
3466
Which is the equivalent of:
3467
 
3468
@smallexample
3469
label_1:  branch label_3
3470
label_2:  branch label_1
3471
label_3:  branch label_4
3472
label_4:  branch label_3
3473
@end smallexample
3474
 
3475
Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
3476
transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3477
The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3478
are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
3479
these parts:
3480
 
3481
@table @code
3482
@item @emph{local label prefix}
3483
All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3484
Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3485
that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
3486
used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
3487
@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3488
object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3489
you may use them in debugging.
3490
 
3491
@item @var{number}
3492
This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
3493
label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3494
 
3495
@item @kbd{C-B}
3496
This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3497
of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3498
 
3499
@item @emph{ordinal number}
3500
This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
3501
@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3502
number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3503
the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3504
@end table
3505
 
3506
So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3507
the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3508
 
3509
@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3510
@cindex dollar local symbols
3511
 
3512
@code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3513
dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3514
soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain valid for only a small
3515
region of the input source code.  Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3516
scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3517
the same local label.
3518
 
3519
Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3520
except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3521
@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3522
 
3523
They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3524
names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3525
to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
3526
@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3527
 
3528
@node Dot
3529
@section The Special Dot Symbol
3530
 
3531
@cindex dot (symbol)
3532
@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3533
@cindex current address
3534
@cindex location counter
3535
The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3536
@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3537
.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3538
Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3539
directive.
3540
@ifclear no-space-dir
3541
Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3542
@samp{.space 4}.
3543
@end ifclear
3544
 
3545
@node Symbol Attributes
3546
@section Symbol Attributes
3547
 
3548
@cindex symbol attributes
3549
@cindex attributes, symbol
3550
Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3551
``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3552
attributes.
3553
@ifset INTERNALS
3554
The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3555
@end ifset
3556
 
3557
If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3558
all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
3559
symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3560
would want.
3561
 
3562
@menu
3563
* Symbol Value::                Value
3564
* Symbol Type::                 Type
3565
@ifset aout-bout
3566
@ifset GENERIC
3567
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3568
@end ifset
3569
@ifclear GENERIC
3570
@ifclear BOUT
3571
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3572
@end ifclear
3573
@ifset BOUT
3574
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3575
@end ifset
3576
@end ifclear
3577
@end ifset
3578
@ifset COFF
3579
* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
3580
@end ifset
3581
@ifset SOM
3582
* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
3583
@end ifset
3584
@end menu
3585
 
3586
@node Symbol Value
3587
@subsection Value
3588
 
3589
@cindex value of a symbol
3590
@cindex symbol value
3591
The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
3592
location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3593
number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3594
Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3595
as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
3596
symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3597
called absolute.
3598
 
3599
The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
3600
 
3601
@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3602
same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3603
name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3604
common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3605
bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
3606
allocated storage.
3607
 
3608
@node Symbol Type
3609
@subsection Type
3610
 
3611
@cindex type of a symbol
3612
@cindex symbol type
3613
The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3614
information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3615
(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
3616
format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3617
 
3618
@ifset aout-bout
3619
@ifclear GENERIC
3620
@ifset BOUT
3621
@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
3622
@c better if it were available outside examples.
3623
@need 1000
3624
@node a.out Symbols
3625
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3626
 
3627
@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3628
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3629
These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3630
one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3631
@code{b.out}.
3632
 
3633
@end ifset
3634
@ifclear BOUT
3635
@node a.out Symbols
3636
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3637
 
3638
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3639
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3640
 
3641
@end ifclear
3642
@end ifclear
3643
@ifset GENERIC
3644
@node a.out Symbols
3645
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3646
 
3647
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3648
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3649
 
3650
@end ifset
3651
@menu
3652
* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
3653
* Symbol Other::                Other
3654
@end menu
3655
 
3656
@node Symbol Desc
3657
@subsubsection Descriptor
3658
 
3659
@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3660
This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
3661
descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3662
(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
3663
@command{@value{AS}}.
3664
 
3665
@node Symbol Other
3666
@subsubsection Other
3667
 
3668
@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3669
This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3670
@end ifset
3671
 
3672
@ifset COFF
3673
@node COFF Symbols
3674
@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3675
 
3676
@cindex COFF symbol attributes
3677
@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3678
 
3679
The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3680
like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3681
@code{.endef} directives.
3682
 
3683
@subsubsection Primary Attributes
3684
 
3685
@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3686
The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3687
respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3688
 
3689
@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3690
 
3691
@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3692
The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3693
@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3694
table information for COFF.
3695
@end ifset
3696
 
3697
@ifset SOM
3698
@node SOM Symbols
3699
@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3700
 
3701
@cindex SOM symbol attributes
3702
@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3703
 
3704
The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3705
the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3706
 
3707
The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3708
Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3709
@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3710
@end ifset
3711
 
3712
@node Expressions
3713
@chapter Expressions
3714
 
3715
@cindex expressions
3716
@cindex addresses
3717
@cindex numeric values
3718
An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3719
Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3720
 
3721
The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3722
a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3723
enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3724
section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3725
the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3726
@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3727
 
3728
@menu
3729
* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
3730
* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
3731
@end menu
3732
 
3733
@node Empty Exprs
3734
@section Empty Expressions
3735
 
3736
@cindex empty expressions
3737
@cindex expressions, empty
3738
An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3739
Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3740
expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
3741
is compatible with other assemblers.
3742
 
3743
@node Integer Exprs
3744
@section Integer Expressions
3745
 
3746
@cindex integer expressions
3747
@cindex expressions, integer
3748
An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3749
by @emph{operators}.
3750
 
3751
@menu
3752
* Arguments::                   Arguments
3753
* Operators::                   Operators
3754
* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
3755
* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
3756
@end menu
3757
 
3758
@node Arguments
3759
@subsection Arguments
3760
 
3761
@cindex expression arguments
3762
@cindex arguments in expressions
3763
@cindex operands in expressions
3764
@cindex arithmetic operands
3765
@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
3766
contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
3767
this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3768
the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3769
expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3770
instruction operands.
3771
 
3772
Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3773
@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3774
or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3775
integer.
3776
 
3777
Numbers are usually integers.
3778
 
3779
A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
3780
that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3781
these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
3782
instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3783
assemblers.
3784
 
3785
@cindex subexpressions
3786
Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3787
expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3788
operator followed by an argument.
3789
 
3790
@node Operators
3791
@subsection Operators
3792
 
3793
@cindex operators, in expressions
3794
@cindex arithmetic functions
3795
@cindex functions, in expressions
3796
@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
3797
operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
3798
between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3799
whitespace.
3800
 
3801
@node Prefix Ops
3802
@subsection Prefix Operator
3803
 
3804
@cindex prefix operators
3805
@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
3806
one argument, which must be absolute.
3807
 
3808
@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3809
@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3810
@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3811
@tex
3812
\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3813
@end tex
3814
 
3815
@table @code
3816
@item -
3817
@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
3818
@item ~
3819
@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
3820
@end table
3821
 
3822
@tex
3823
\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3824
@end tex
3825
 
3826
@node Infix Ops
3827
@subsection Infix Operators
3828
 
3829
@cindex infix operators
3830
@cindex operators, permitted arguments
3831
@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
3832
have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3833
to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3834
absolute, and the result is absolute.
3835
 
3836
@enumerate
3837
@cindex operator precedence
3838
@cindex precedence of operators
3839
 
3840
@item
3841
Highest Precedence
3842
 
3843
@table @code
3844
@item *
3845
@dfn{Multiplication}.
3846
 
3847
@item /
3848
@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3849
 
3850
@item %
3851
@dfn{Remainder}.
3852
 
3853
@item <<
3854
@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3855
 
3856
@item >>
3857
@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3858
@end table
3859
 
3860
@item
3861
Intermediate precedence
3862
 
3863
@table @code
3864
@item |
3865
 
3866
@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3867
 
3868
@item &
3869
@dfn{Bitwise And}.
3870
 
3871
@item ^
3872
@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3873
 
3874
@item !
3875
@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3876
@end table
3877
 
3878
@item
3879
Low Precedence
3880
 
3881
@table @code
3882
@cindex addition, permitted arguments
3883
@cindex plus, permitted arguments
3884
@cindex arguments for addition
3885
@item +
3886
@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3887
the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
3888
sections.
3889
 
3890
@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3891
@cindex minus, permitted arguments
3892
@cindex arguments for subtraction
3893
@item -
3894
@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
3895
result has the section of the left argument.
3896
If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3897
You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3898
@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3899
 
3900
@cindex comparison expressions
3901
@cindex expressions, comparison
3902
@item  ==
3903
@dfn{Is Equal To}
3904
@item <>
3905
@itemx !=
3906
@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3907
@item <
3908
@dfn{Is Less Than}
3909
@item >
3910
@dfn{Is Greater Than}
3911
@item >=
3912
@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3913
@item <=
3914
@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3915
 
3916
The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
3917
value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
3918
perform signed comparisons.
3919
@end table
3920
 
3921
@item Lowest Precedence
3922
 
3923
@table @code
3924
@item &&
3925
@dfn{Logical And}.
3926
 
3927
@item ||
3928
@dfn{Logical Or}.
3929
 
3930
These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3931
expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3932
value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
3933
or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3934
 
3935
@end table
3936
@end enumerate
3937
 
3938
In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3939
address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3940
 
3941
@node Pseudo Ops
3942
@chapter Assembler Directives
3943
 
3944
@cindex directives, machine independent
3945
@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3946
@cindex machine independent directives
3947
All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3948
The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3949
 
3950
This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3951
target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3952
@ifset GENERIC
3953
Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3954
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3955
@end ifset
3956
@ifclear GENERIC
3957
@ifset machine-directives
3958
@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3959
@end ifset
3960
@end ifclear
3961
 
3962
@menu
3963
* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
3964
@ifset COFF
3965
* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
3966
@end ifset
3967
 
3968
* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3969
* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
3970
* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3971
* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3972
* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3973
* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
3974
* CFI directives::              @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
3975
* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
3976
* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
3977
@ifset COFF
3978
* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
3979
@end ifset
3980
@ifset aout-bout
3981
* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
3982
@end ifset
3983
@ifset COFF
3984
* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
3985
@end ifset
3986
 
3987
* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
3988
* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
3989
* Else::                        @code{.else}
3990
* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
3991
* End::                         @code{.end}
3992
@ifset COFF
3993
* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
3994
@end ifset
3995
 
3996
* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
3997
* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
3998
* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3999
* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4000
* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4001
* Err::                         @code{.err}
4002
* Error::                       @code{.error @var{string}}
4003
* Exitm::                       @code{.exitm}
4004
* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
4005
* Fail::                        @code{.fail}
4006
* File::                        @code{.file}
4007
* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4008
* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4009
* Func::                        @code{.func}
4010
* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4011
@ifset ELF
4012
* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4013
* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4014
@end ifset
4015
 
4016
* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4017
* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
4018
* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4019
* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4020
* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4021
* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4022
@ifset ELF
4023
* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
4024
@end ifset
4025
 
4026
* Irp::                         @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4027
* Irpc::                        @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4028
* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4029
* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
4030
@ifclear no-line-dir
4031
* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4032
@end ifclear
4033
 
4034
* Linkonce::                    @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4035
* List::                        @code{.list}
4036
* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4037
* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4038
* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4039
@ifset ELF
4040
* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
4041
@end ifset
4042
 
4043
* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4044
@ignore
4045
* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4046
@end ignore
4047
 
4048
* Macro::                       @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4049
* MRI::                         @code{.mri @var{val}}
4050
* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
4051
* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
4052
* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4053 160 khays
* Offset::                      @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4054 147 khays
* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4055
* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4056
@ifset ELF
4057
* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
4058
* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
4059
@end ifset
4060
 
4061
* Print::                       @code{.print @var{string}}
4062
@ifset ELF
4063
* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
4064
@end ifset
4065
 
4066
* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4067
* Purgem::                      @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4068
@ifset ELF
4069
* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4070
@end ifset
4071
 
4072
* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4073
* Reloc::                       @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4074
* Rept::                        @code{.rept @var{count}}
4075
* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4076
@ifset COFF
4077
* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
4078
@end ifset
4079
@ifset COFF-ELF
4080
* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4081
@end ifset
4082
 
4083
* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4084
* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4085
* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4086
@ifset COFF-ELF
4087
* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4088
@end ifset
4089
@ifclear no-space-dir
4090
* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4091
@end ifclear
4092
 
4093
* Sleb128::                     @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4094
@ifclear no-space-dir
4095
* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4096
@end ifclear
4097
@ifset have-stabs
4098
* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4099
@end ifset
4100
 
4101
* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4102
* Struct::                      @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4103
@ifset ELF
4104
* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
4105
* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4106
@end ifset
4107
 
4108
@ifset COFF
4109
* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4110
@end ifset
4111
 
4112
* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4113
* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4114
@ifset COFF-ELF
4115
* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4116
@end ifset
4117
 
4118
* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4119
@ifset COFF
4120
* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
4121
@end ifset
4122
 
4123
@ifset ELF
4124
* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4125
* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4126
* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4127
@end ifset
4128
 
4129
* Warning::                     @code{.warning @var{string}}
4130
* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
4131
* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4132
* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4133
* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
4134
@end menu
4135
 
4136
@node Abort
4137
@section @code{.abort}
4138
 
4139
@cindex @code{abort} directive
4140
@cindex stopping the assembly
4141
This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
4142
compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
4143
assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
4144
of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4145
quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4146
 
4147
@ifset COFF
4148
@node ABORT (COFF)
4149
@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4150
 
4151
@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4152
When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4153
synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4154
 
4155
@ifset BOUT
4156
When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4157
but ignores it.
4158
@end ifset
4159
@end ifset
4160
 
4161
@node Align
4162
@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4163
 
4164
@cindex padding the location counter
4165
@cindex @code{align} directive
4166
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4167
boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4168
required, as described below.
4169
 
4170
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4171
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4172
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4173
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4174
with no-op instructions.
4175
 
4176
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4177
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4178
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4179
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4180
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4181
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4182
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4183
 
4184
The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4185
For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4186
s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4187
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4188
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4189
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
4190
first expression is the alignment request in words.
4191
 
4192
For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4193
strongarm, it is the
4194
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4195
advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4196
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
4197
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4198
 
4199
This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4200
native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4201
GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4202
described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4203
architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4204
 
4205
@node Altmacro
4206
@section @code{.altmacro}
4207
Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4208
 
4209
@ftable @code
4210
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4211
One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
4212
generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4213
replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
4214
replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4215
separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4216
define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4217
 
4218
@item String delimiters
4219
You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4220
@code{"@var{string}"}:
4221
 
4222
@table @code
4223
@item '@var{string}'
4224
You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4225
 
4226
@item <@var{string}>
4227
You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4228
@end table
4229
 
4230
@item single-character string escape
4231
To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4232
character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4233
character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
4234
write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4235
 
4236
@item Expression results as strings
4237
You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4238
and use the result as a string.
4239
@end ftable
4240
 
4241
@node Ascii
4242
@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4243
 
4244
@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4245
@cindex string literals
4246
@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4247
separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
4248
trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4249
 
4250
@node Asciz
4251
@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4252
 
4253
@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4254
@cindex zero-terminated strings
4255
@cindex null-terminated strings
4256
@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4257
a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4258
 
4259
@node Balign
4260
@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4261
 
4262
@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4263
@cindex @code{balign} directive
4264
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4265
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4266
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4267
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4268
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4269
 
4270
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4271
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4272
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4273
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4274
with no-op instructions.
4275
 
4276
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4277
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4278
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4279
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4280
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4281
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4282
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4283
 
4284
@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4285
@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4286
The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4287
@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4288
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4289
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
4290
4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
4291
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4292
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4293
undefined.
4294
 
4295
@node Byte
4296
@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4297
 
4298
@cindex @code{byte} directive
4299
@cindex integers, one byte
4300
@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4301
Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4302
 
4303
@node CFI directives
4304
@section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4305
@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4306
@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4307
should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4308
If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4309
if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4310
To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
4311
directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4312
 
4313
@section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4314
@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4315
@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4316
should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4317
data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4318
@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4319
 
4320
Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4321
it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4322
 
4323
@section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4324
@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4325
@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4326
unwind entry previously opened by
4327
@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4328
 
4329
@section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4330
@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4331
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4332
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4333
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4334
a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
4335
the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4336
can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4337
The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4338
no personality routine.
4339
 
4340
@section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4341
@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4342
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4343
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4344
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4345
or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4346
no LSDA.
4347
 
4348
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4349
@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4350
address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4351
 
4352
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4353
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4354
now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4355
remains the same.
4356
 
4357
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4358
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4359
remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4360
absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4361
CFA address.
4362
 
4363
@section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4364
Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4365
value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4366
 
4367
@section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4368
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4369
CFA.
4370
 
4371
@section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4372
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4373
the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4374
using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4375
This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4376
code it's annotating.
4377
 
4378
@section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4379
Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4380
 
4381
@section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4382
@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4383
same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4384
instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4385
 
4386
@section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4387
From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4388
 
4389
@section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4390
Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4391
i.e. no restoration needed.
4392
 
4393
@section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4394
First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4395
then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4396
everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4397
the previous saved state.
4398
 
4399
@section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4400
Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4401
directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4402
 
4403
@section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4404
Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4405
 
4406
@section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4407
SPARC register window has been saved.
4408
 
4409
@section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4410
Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
4411
might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4412
opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4413
 
4414
@section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4415
The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
4416
will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4417
description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4418
 
4419
The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4420
limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
4421
mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4422
by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4423
or another register.
4424
 
4425
@node Comm
4426
@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4427
 
4428
@cindex @code{comm} directive
4429
@cindex symbol, common
4430
@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
4431
common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4432
of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4433
definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4434
allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
4435
absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4436
the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4437
using the largest size.
4438
 
4439
@ifset COFF-ELF
4440
When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4441
an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4442
specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4443
that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4444
as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4445
boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4446
power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4447
common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
4448
alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4449
largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4450
maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4451
is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4452
@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4453
multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4454
It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4455
(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4456
@end ifset
4457
 
4458
@ifset HPPA
4459
The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
4460
@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4461
@end ifset
4462
 
4463
@node Data
4464
@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4465
 
4466
@cindex @code{data} directive
4467
@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4468
end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4469
absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4470
to zero.
4471
 
4472
@ifset COFF
4473
@node Def
4474
@section @code{.def @var{name}}
4475
 
4476
@cindex @code{def} directive
4477
@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4478
@cindex debugging COFF symbols
4479
Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4480
definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4481
@ifset BOUT
4482
 
4483
This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4484
format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4485
but ignored.
4486
@end ifset
4487
@end ifset
4488
 
4489
@ifset aout-bout
4490
@node Desc
4491
@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4492
 
4493
@cindex @code{desc} directive
4494
@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4495
@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4496
This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4497
to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4498
 
4499
@ifset COFF
4500
The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4501
configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4502
object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4503
it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4504
@end ifset
4505
@end ifset
4506
 
4507
@ifset COFF
4508
@node Dim
4509
@section @code{.dim}
4510
 
4511
@cindex @code{dim} directive
4512
@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4513
@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4514
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4515
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
4516
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4517
@ifset BOUT
4518
 
4519
@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4520
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4521
ignores it.
4522
@end ifset
4523
@end ifset
4524
 
4525
@node Double
4526
@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4527
 
4528
@cindex @code{double} directive
4529
@cindex floating point numbers (double)
4530
@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4531
assembles floating point numbers.
4532
@ifset GENERIC
4533
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4534
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4535
@end ifset
4536
@ifclear GENERIC
4537
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4538
On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4539
in @sc{ieee} format.
4540
@end ifset
4541
@end ifclear
4542
 
4543
@node Eject
4544
@section @code{.eject}
4545
 
4546
@cindex @code{eject} directive
4547
@cindex new page, in listings
4548
@cindex page, in listings
4549
@cindex listing control: new page
4550
Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4551
 
4552
@node Else
4553
@section @code{.else}
4554
 
4555
@cindex @code{else} directive
4556
@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4557
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
4558
of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4559
was false.
4560
 
4561
@node Elseif
4562
@section @code{.elseif}
4563
 
4564
@cindex @code{elseif} directive
4565
@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4566
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
4567
@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4568
 
4569
@node End
4570
@section @code{.end}
4571
 
4572
@cindex @code{end} directive
4573
@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
4574
process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4575
 
4576
@ifset COFF
4577
@node Endef
4578
@section @code{.endef}
4579
 
4580
@cindex @code{endef} directive
4581
This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4582
@code{.def}.
4583
@ifset BOUT
4584
 
4585
@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4586
@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4587
directive but ignores it.
4588
@end ifset
4589
@end ifset
4590
 
4591
@node Endfunc
4592
@section @code{.endfunc}
4593
@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4594
@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4595
 
4596
@node Endif
4597
@section @code{.endif}
4598
 
4599
@cindex @code{endif} directive
4600
@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4601
it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4602
conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4603
 
4604
@node Equ
4605
@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4606
 
4607
@cindex @code{equ} directive
4608
@cindex assigning values to symbols
4609
@cindex symbols, assigning values to
4610
This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4611
It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4612
 
4613
@ifset HPPA
4614
The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4615
@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4616
@end ifset
4617
 
4618
@ifset Z80
4619
The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4620
@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4621
On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4622
but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4623
Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4624
@end ifset
4625
 
4626
@node Equiv
4627
@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4628
@cindex @code{equiv} directive
4629
The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4630
the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
4631
symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4632
undefined.
4633
 
4634
Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4635
@smallexample
4636
.ifdef SYM
4637
.err
4638
.endif
4639
.equ SYM,VAL
4640
@end smallexample
4641
plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4642
 
4643
@node Eqv
4644
@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4645
@cindex @code{eqv} directive
4646
The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4647
evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
4648
the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4649
value is taken.
4650
 
4651
@node Err
4652
@section @code{.err}
4653
@cindex @code{err} directive
4654
If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4655
message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4656
object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4657
 
4658
@node Error
4659
@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4660
@cindex error directive
4661
 
4662
Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4663
string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
4664
message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4665
@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4666
 
4667
@smallexample
4668
 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4669
@end smallexample
4670
 
4671
@node Exitm
4672
@section @code{.exitm}
4673
Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
4674
 
4675
@node Extern
4676
@section @code{.extern}
4677
 
4678
@cindex @code{extern} directive
4679
@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4680
with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
4681
all undefined symbols as external.
4682
 
4683
@node Fail
4684
@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4685
 
4686
@cindex @code{fail} directive
4687
Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4688
or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
4689
than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
4690
include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
4691
complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4692
 
4693
@node File
4694
@section @code{.file}
4695
@cindex @code{file} directive
4696
 
4697
@ifclear no-file-dir
4698
There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
4699
that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4700
@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
4701
 
4702
@subheading Default Version
4703
 
4704
@cindex logical file name
4705
@cindex file name, logical
4706
This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4707
are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
4708
 
4709
@smallexample
4710
.file @var{string}
4711
@end smallexample
4712
 
4713
@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
4714
recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4715
to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
4716
statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4717
old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4718
 
4719
@subheading DWARF2 Version
4720
@end ifclear
4721
 
4722
When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4723
to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
4724
 
4725
@smallexample
4726
.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4727
@end smallexample
4728
 
4729
The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4730
index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4731
literal.
4732
 
4733
The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4734
table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4735
information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4736
entries will have.
4737
 
4738
@node Fill
4739
@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4740
 
4741
@cindex @code{fill} directive
4742
@cindex writing patterns in memory
4743
@cindex patterns, writing in memory
4744
@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4745
This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
4746
may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4747
more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4748
other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4749
is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
4750
zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4751
byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4752
Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4753
@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
4754
compatible with other people's assemblers.
4755
 
4756
@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4757
If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4758
assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4759
@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4760
 
4761
@node Float
4762
@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4763
 
4764
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
4765
@cindex @code{float} directive
4766
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4767
has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4768
@ifset GENERIC
4769
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4770
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4771
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4772
@end ifset
4773
@ifclear GENERIC
4774
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4775
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4776
in @sc{ieee} format.
4777
@end ifset
4778
@end ifclear
4779
 
4780
@node Func
4781
@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4782
@cindex @code{func} directive
4783
@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4784
is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4785
Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4786
@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4787
prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4788
@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4789
All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4790
The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4791
 
4792
@node Global
4793
@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4794
 
4795
@cindex @code{global} directive
4796
@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4797
@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
4798
@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4799
other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
4800
@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4801
from another file linked into the same program.
4802
 
4803
Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4804
compatibility with other assemblers.
4805
 
4806
@ifset HPPA
4807
On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4808
partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4809
@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4810
@end ifset
4811
 
4812
@ifset ELF
4813
@node Gnu_attribute
4814
@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4815
Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
4816
 
4817
@node Hidden
4818
@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4819
 
4820
@cindex @code{hidden} directive
4821
@cindex visibility
4822
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4823
@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4824
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4825
 
4826
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4827
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4828
@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4829
Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4830
@end ifset
4831
 
4832
@node hword
4833
@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4834
 
4835
@cindex @code{hword} directive
4836
@cindex integers, 16-bit
4837
@cindex numbers, 16-bit
4838
@cindex sixteen bit integers
4839
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4840
a 16 bit number for each.
4841
 
4842
@ifset GENERIC
4843
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4844
architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4845
@end ifset
4846
@ifclear GENERIC
4847
@ifset W32
4848
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4849
@end ifset
4850
@ifset W16
4851
This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4852
@end ifset
4853
@end ifclear
4854
 
4855
@node Ident
4856
@section @code{.ident}
4857
 
4858
@cindex @code{ident} directive
4859
 
4860
This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
4861
behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
4862
a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4863
source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4864
for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4865
@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
4866
emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4867
 
4868
@node If
4869
@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4870
 
4871
@cindex conditional assembly
4872
@cindex @code{if} directive
4873
@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4874
considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4875
(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
4876
the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4877
(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4878
alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4879
If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4880
nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4881
 
4882
The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4883
@table @code
4884
@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4885
@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4886
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4887
has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4888
is considered to be undefined.
4889
 
4890
@cindex @code{ifb} directive
4891
@item .ifb @var{text}
4892
Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4893
 
4894
@cindex @code{ifc} directive
4895
@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4896
Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
4897
strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
4898
the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4899
end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
4900
string comparison is case sensitive.
4901
 
4902
@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4903
@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4904
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4905
 
4906
@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4907
@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4908
Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4909
 
4910
@cindex @code{ifge} directive
4911
@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
4912
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
4913
equal to zero.
4914
 
4915
@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
4916
@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
4917
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
4918
 
4919
@cindex @code{ifle} directive
4920
@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
4921
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
4922
to zero.
4923
 
4924
@cindex @code{iflt} directive
4925
@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
4926
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
4927
 
4928
@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
4929
@item .ifnb @var{text}
4930
Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4931
following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
4932
 
4933
@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
4934
@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
4935
Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4936
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4937
 
4938
@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
4939
@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
4940
@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
4941
@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
4942
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4943
has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
4944
which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
4945
 
4946
@cindex @code{ifne} directive
4947
@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
4948
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
4949
(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
4950
 
4951
@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
4952
@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
4953
Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4954
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4955
@end table
4956
 
4957
@node Incbin
4958
@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4959
 
4960
@cindex @code{incbin} directive
4961
@cindex binary files, including
4962
The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
4963
location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
4964
option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4965
around @var{file}.
4966
 
4967
The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
4968
@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
4969
read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
4970
responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
4971
after the @code{incbin} directive.
4972
 
4973
@node Include
4974
@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4975
 
4976
@cindex @code{include} directive
4977
@cindex supporting files, including
4978
@cindex files, including
4979
This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
4980
points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
4981
if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
4982
included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
4983
can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
4984
(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4985
around @var{file}.
4986
 
4987
@node Int
4988
@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4989
 
4990
@cindex @code{int} directive
4991
@cindex integers, 32-bit
4992
Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
4993
For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
4994
expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
4995
of target the assembly is for.
4996
 
4997
@ifclear GENERIC
4998
@ifset H8
4999
On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5000
integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5001
32-bit integers.
5002
@end ifset
5003
@end ifclear
5004
 
5005
@ifset ELF
5006
@node Internal
5007
@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5008
 
5009
@cindex @code{internal} directive
5010
@cindex visibility
5011
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5012
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5013
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5014
 
5015
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5016
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5017
@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5018
(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5019
processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
5020
@end ifset
5021
 
5022
@node Irp
5023
@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5024
 
5025
@cindex @code{irp} directive
5026
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5027
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5028
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5029
set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
5030
@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5031
@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5032
sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5033
 
5034
For example, assembling
5035
 
5036
@example
5037
        .irp    param,1,2,3
5038
        move    d\param,sp@@-
5039
        .endr
5040
@end example
5041
 
5042
is equivalent to assembling
5043
 
5044
@example
5045
        move    d1,sp@@-
5046
        move    d2,sp@@-
5047
        move    d3,sp@@-
5048
@end example
5049
 
5050
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5051
 
5052
@node Irpc
5053
@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5054
 
5055
@cindex @code{irpc} directive
5056
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5057
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5058
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
5059
@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5060
assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5061
assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
5062
@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5063
 
5064
For example, assembling
5065
 
5066
@example
5067
        .irpc    param,123
5068
        move    d\param,sp@@-
5069
        .endr
5070
@end example
5071
 
5072
is equivalent to assembling
5073
 
5074
@example
5075
        move    d1,sp@@-
5076
        move    d2,sp@@-
5077
        move    d3,sp@@-
5078
@end example
5079
 
5080
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5081
at @xref{Macro}.
5082
 
5083
@node Lcomm
5084
@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5085
 
5086
@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5087
@cindex local common symbols
5088
@cindex symbols, local common
5089
Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5090
denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5091
those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
5092
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
5093
is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5094
not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5095
 
5096
@ifset GENERIC
5097
Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
5098
argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5099
@end ifset
5100
 
5101
@ifset HPPA
5102
The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
5103
@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5104
@end ifset
5105
 
5106
@node Lflags
5107
@section @code{.lflags}
5108
 
5109
@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5110
@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5111
assemblers, but ignores it.
5112
 
5113
@ifclear no-line-dir
5114
@node Line
5115
@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5116
 
5117
@cindex @code{line} directive
5118
@cindex logical line number
5119
@ifset aout-bout
5120
Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5121
expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
5122
statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5123
reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
5124
@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5125
for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5126
@end ifset
5127
 
5128
Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5129
@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5130
when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5131
were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5132
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5133
 
5134
Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5135
used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5136
debugging.
5137
@end ifclear
5138
 
5139
@node Linkonce
5140
@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5141
@cindex COMDAT
5142
@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5143
@cindex common sections
5144
Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5145
This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5146
but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5147
The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5148
Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5149
unique.
5150
 
5151
This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5152
writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5153
Executable format used on Windows NT.
5154
 
5155
The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
5156
following strings.  For example:
5157
@smallexample
5158
.linkonce same_size
5159
@end smallexample
5160
Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5161
 
5162
@table @code
5163
@item discard
5164
Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
5165
 
5166
@item one_only
5167
Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5168
 
5169
@item same_size
5170
Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5171
 
5172
@item same_contents
5173
Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5174
@end table
5175
 
5176
@node List
5177
@section @code{.list}
5178
 
5179
@cindex @code{list} directive
5180
@cindex listing control, turning on
5181
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5182
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5183
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5184
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5185
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5186
 
5187
By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
5188
@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5189
the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5190
 
5191
@node Ln
5192
@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5193
 
5194
@cindex @code{ln} directive
5195
@ifclear no-line-dir
5196
@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5197
@end ifclear
5198
@ifset no-line-dir
5199
Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
5200
must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
5201
line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5202
statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5203
line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5204
@ifset BOUT
5205
 
5206
This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5207
configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5208
output format.
5209
@end ifset
5210
@end ifset
5211
 
5212
@node Loc
5213
@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5214
@cindex @code{loc} directive
5215
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5216
the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5217
number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5218
instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5219
arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5220
the row is added.
5221
 
5222
The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5223
 
5224
@table @code
5225
@item basic_block
5226
This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5227
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5228
 
5229
@item prologue_end
5230
This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5231
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5232
 
5233
@item epilogue_begin
5234
This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5235
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5236
 
5237
@item is_stmt @var{value}
5238
This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5239
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5240
either 0 or 1.
5241
 
5242
@item isa @var{value}
5243
This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5244
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5245
 
5246
@item discriminator @var{value}
5247
This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5248
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5249
 
5250
@end table
5251
 
5252
@node Loc_mark_labels
5253
@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5254
@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5255
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5256
the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5257
to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5258
register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5259
The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5260
this function respectively.
5261
 
5262
@ifset ELF
5263
@node Local
5264
@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5265
 
5266
@cindex @code{local} directive
5267
This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5268
the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5269
will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
5270
they will be created.
5271
 
5272
For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5273
accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5274
the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5275
(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5276
@end ifset
5277
 
5278
@node Long
5279
@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5280
 
5281
@cindex @code{long} directive
5282
@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5283
 
5284
@ignore
5285
@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5286
@c what it really ought to do
5287
@node Lsym
5288
@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5289
 
5290
@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5291
@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5292
@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5293
the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5294
rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5295
the same as the expression value:
5296
@smallexample
5297
@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5298
@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5299
@var{value} = @var{expression}
5300
@end smallexample
5301
@noindent
5302
The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5303
@end ignore
5304
 
5305
@node Macro
5306
@section @code{.macro}
5307
 
5308
@cindex macros
5309
The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5310
generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
5311
@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5312
 
5313
@example
5314
        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
5315
        .long   \from
5316
        .if     \to-\from
5317
        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
5318
        .endif
5319
        .endm
5320
@end example
5321
 
5322
@noindent
5323
With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5324
 
5325
@example
5326
        .long   0
5327
        .long   1
5328
        .long   2
5329
        .long   3
5330
        .long   4
5331
        .long   5
5332
@end example
5333
 
5334
@ftable @code
5335
@item .macro @var{macname}
5336
@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5337
@cindex @code{macro} directive
5338
Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
5339
definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5340
separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
5341
indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5342
@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5343
(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
5344
macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
5345
cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5346
subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5347
definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5348
 
5349
@table @code
5350
@item .macro comm
5351
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5352
arguments.
5353
 
5354
@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
5355
@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5356
Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5357
which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5358
@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5359
 
5360
@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5361
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5362
arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5363
After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5364
@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5365
@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5366
,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5367
@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5368
 
5369
@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5370
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5371
arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5372
not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5373
will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5374
 
5375
When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5376
position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5377
@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5378
 
5379
@end table
5380
 
5381
Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5382
as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5383
occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5384
characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
5385
(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5386
architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5387
character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5388
replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5389
construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5390
identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
5391
this macro definition:
5392
 
5393
@example
5394
        .macro label l
5395
\l:
5396
        .endm
5397
@end example
5398
 
5399
might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5400
called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5401
assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5402
identifier.
5403
 
5404
Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5405
which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
5406
for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5407
length specifier like this:
5408
 
5409
@example
5410
        .macro opcode base length
5411
        \base.\length
5412
        .endm
5413
@end example
5414
 
5415
and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5416
instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5417
interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5418
 
5419
There are several possible ways around this problem:
5420
 
5421
@table @code
5422
@item Insert white space
5423
If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5424
solution.  eg:
5425
 
5426
@example
5427
        .macro label l
5428
\l :
5429
        .endm
5430
@end example
5431
 
5432
@item Use @samp{\()}
5433
The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5434
the following text.  eg:
5435
 
5436
@example
5437
        .macro opcode base length
5438
        \base\().\length
5439
        .endm
5440
@end example
5441
 
5442
@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5443
In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5444
used as a separator.  eg:
5445
 
5446
@example
5447
        .altmacro
5448
        .macro label l
5449
l&:
5450
        .endm
5451
@end example
5452
@end table
5453
 
5454
Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5455
also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5456
and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5457
 
5458
@item .endm
5459
@cindex @code{endm} directive
5460
Mark the end of a macro definition.
5461
 
5462
@item .exitm
5463
@cindex @code{exitm} directive
5464
Exit early from the current macro definition.
5465
 
5466
@cindex number of macros executed
5467
@cindex macros, count executed
5468
@item \@@
5469
@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5470
executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5471
output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5472
 
5473
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5474
@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5475
macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5476
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5477
@end ftable
5478
 
5479
@node MRI
5480
@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5481
 
5482
@cindex @code{mri} directive
5483
@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5484
If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
5485
@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
5486
affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5487
of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5488
 
5489
@node Noaltmacro
5490
@section @code{.noaltmacro}
5491
Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
5492
 
5493
@node Nolist
5494
@section @code{.nolist}
5495
 
5496
@cindex @code{nolist} directive
5497
@cindex listing control, turning off
5498
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5499
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5500
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5501
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5502
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5503
 
5504
@node Octa
5505
@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5506
 
5507
@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
5508
@cindex @code{octa} directive
5509
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5510
@cindex sixteen byte integer
5511
This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
5512
bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5513
 
5514
The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5515
hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5516
 
5517 160 khays
@node Offset
5518
@section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5519
 
5520
@cindex @code{offset} directive
5521
Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section.  @var{loc} must
5522
be an absolute expression.  This directive may be useful for defining
5523
symbols with absolute values.  Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5524
directive.
5525
 
5526 147 khays
@node Org
5527
@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5528
 
5529
@cindex @code{org} directive
5530
@cindex location counter, advancing
5531
@cindex advancing location counter
5532
@cindex current address, advancing
5533
Advance the location counter of the current section to
5534
@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5535
expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
5536
you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5537
wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
5538
with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5539
@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5540
is the same as the current subsection.
5541
 
5542
@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5543
unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5544
backwards.
5545
 
5546
@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5547
@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5548
@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5549
Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5550
may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5551
a chance to share your improved assembler.
5552
 
5553
Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5554
to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
5555
people's assemblers.
5556
 
5557
When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5558
intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5559
absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5560
@var{fill} defaults to zero.
5561
 
5562
@node P2align
5563
@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5564
 
5565
@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5566
@cindex @code{p2align} directive
5567
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5568
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5569
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5570
advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5571
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
5572
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5573
 
5574
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5575
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
5576
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
5577
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5578
with no-op instructions.
5579
 
5580
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
5581
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5582
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5583
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
5584
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5585
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5586
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5587
 
5588
@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5589
@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5590
The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5591
@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5592
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5593
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
5594
2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
5595
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5596
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5597
undefined.
5598
 
5599
@ifset ELF
5600
@node PopSection
5601
@section @code{.popsection}
5602
 
5603
@cindex @code{popsection} directive
5604
@cindex Section Stack
5605
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5606
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5607
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5608
(@pxref{Previous}).
5609
 
5610
This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5611
section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
5612
stack.
5613
@end ifset
5614
 
5615
@ifset ELF
5616
@node Previous
5617
@section @code{.previous}
5618
 
5619
@cindex @code{previous} directive
5620
@cindex Section Stack
5621
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5622
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5623
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5624
(@pxref{PopSection}).
5625
 
5626
This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5627
referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
5628
@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5629
subsections).  For example:
5630
 
5631
@smallexample
5632
.section A
5633
 .subsection 1
5634
  .word 0x1234
5635
 .subsection 2
5636
  .word 0x5678
5637
.previous
5638
 .word 0x9abc
5639
@end smallexample
5640
 
5641
Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5642
section A.  Whilst:
5643
 
5644
@smallexample
5645
.section A
5646
.subsection 1
5647
  # Now in section A subsection 1
5648
  .word 0x1234
5649
.section B
5650
.subsection 0
5651
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5652
  .word 0x5678
5653
.subsection 1
5654
  # Now in section B subsection 1
5655
  .word 0x9abc
5656
.previous
5657
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5658
  .word 0xdef0
5659
@end smallexample
5660
 
5661
Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5662
section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5663
 
5664
In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5665
the top section on the section stack.
5666
@end ifset
5667
 
5668
@node Print
5669
@section @code{.print @var{string}}
5670
 
5671
@cindex @code{print} directive
5672
@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5673
assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5674
 
5675
@ifset ELF
5676
@node Protected
5677
@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5678
 
5679
@cindex @code{protected} directive
5680
@cindex visibility
5681
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5682
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5683
 
5684
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5685
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5686
@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5687
components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5688
component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5689
this.
5690
@end ifset
5691
 
5692
@node Psize
5693
@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5694
 
5695
@cindex @code{psize} directive
5696
@cindex listing control: paper size
5697
@cindex paper size, for listings
5698
Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5699
number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5700
 
5701
If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5702
of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5703
default width is 200 columns.
5704
 
5705
@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5706
lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5707
@code{.eject}).
5708
 
5709
If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5710
those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5711
 
5712
@node Purgem
5713
@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5714
 
5715
@cindex @code{purgem} directive
5716
Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5717
expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
5718
 
5719
@ifset ELF
5720
@node PushSection
5721
@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5722
 
5723
@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5724
@cindex Section Stack
5725
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5726
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5727
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5728
(@pxref{Previous}).
5729
 
5730
This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5731
top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5732
subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5733
@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5734
as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5735
@end ifset
5736
 
5737
@node Quad
5738
@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5739
 
5740
@cindex @code{quad} directive
5741
@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
5742
each bignum, it emits
5743
@ifclear bignum-16
5744
an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5745
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5746
@cindex eight-byte integer
5747
@cindex integer, 8-byte
5748
 
5749
The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5750
hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5751
@end ifclear
5752
@ifset bignum-16
5753
a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5754
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5755
@cindex sixteen-byte integer
5756
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5757
@end ifset
5758
 
5759
@node Reloc
5760
@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5761
 
5762
@cindex @code{reloc} directive
5763
Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5764
@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5765
the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5766
symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5767
@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5768
absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
5769
targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5770
relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5771
section.
5772
 
5773
@node Rept
5774
@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5775
 
5776
@cindex @code{rept} directive
5777
Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5778
@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5779
 
5780
For example, assembling
5781
 
5782
@example
5783
        .rept   3
5784
        .long   0
5785
        .endr
5786
@end example
5787
 
5788
is equivalent to assembling
5789
 
5790
@example
5791
        .long   0
5792
        .long   0
5793
        .long   0
5794
@end example
5795
 
5796
@node Sbttl
5797
@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5798
 
5799
@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5800
@cindex subtitles for listings
5801
@cindex listing control: subtitle
5802
Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5803
title line) when generating assembly listings.
5804
 
5805
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5806
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5807
 
5808
@ifset COFF
5809
@node Scl
5810
@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5811
 
5812
@cindex @code{scl} directive
5813
@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5814
@cindex COFF symbol storage class
5815
Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
5816
used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
5817
whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5818
symbolic debugging information.
5819
@ifset BOUT
5820
 
5821
The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5822
configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5823
accepts this directive but ignores it.
5824
@end ifset
5825
@end ifset
5826
 
5827
@ifset COFF-ELF
5828
@node Section
5829
@section @code{.section @var{name}}
5830
 
5831
@cindex named section
5832
Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5833
named @var{name}.
5834
 
5835
This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5836
named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5837
with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5838
 
5839
@ifset COFF
5840
@ifset ELF
5841
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5842
@subheading COFF Version
5843
@end ifset
5844
 
5845
@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5846
For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5847
ways:
5848
 
5849
@smallexample
5850
.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5851
.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5852
@end smallexample
5853
 
5854
If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5855
section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
5856
@table @code
5857
@item b
5858
bss section (uninitialized data)
5859
@item n
5860
section is not loaded
5861
@item w
5862
writable section
5863
@item d
5864
data section
5865
@item r
5866
read-only section
5867
@item x
5868
executable section
5869
@item s
5870
shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5871
@item a
5872
ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5873
@item y
5874
section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5875
@item 0-9
5876
single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5877
@end table
5878
 
5879
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5880
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5881
loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5882
from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5883
will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5884
 
5885
If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5886
taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5887
@end ifset
5888
 
5889
@ifset ELF
5890
@ifset COFF
5891
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5892
@subheading ELF Version
5893
@end ifset
5894
 
5895
@cindex Section Stack
5896
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5897
@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5898
(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5899
@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5900
 
5901
@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5902
For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5903
 
5904
@smallexample
5905
.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5906
@end smallexample
5907
 
5908
The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
5909
combination of the following characters:
5910
@table @code
5911
@item a
5912
section is allocatable
5913
@item e
5914
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5915
@item w
5916
section is writable
5917
@item x
5918
section is executable
5919
@item M
5920
section is mergeable
5921
@item S
5922
section contains zero terminated strings
5923
@item G
5924
section is a member of a section group
5925
@item T
5926
section is used for thread-local-storage
5927
@item ?
5928
section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
5929
@end table
5930
 
5931
The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
5932
@table @code
5933
@item @@progbits
5934
section contains data
5935
@item @@nobits
5936
section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
5937
@item @@note
5938
section contains data which is used by things other than the program
5939
@item @@init_array
5940
section contains an array of pointers to init functions
5941
@item @@fini_array
5942
section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
5943
@item @@preinit_array
5944
section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
5945
@end table
5946
 
5947
Many targets only support the first three section types.
5948
 
5949
Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
5950
ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
5951
@code{%} character.
5952
 
5953
If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5954
be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
5955
 
5956
@smallexample
5957
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
5958
@end smallexample
5959
 
5960
Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
5961
constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
5962
@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
5963
@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
5964
the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
5965
absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
5966
which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
5967
@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
5968
@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
5969
 
5970
If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5971
be present along with an additional field like this:
5972
 
5973
@smallexample
5974
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5975
@end smallexample
5976
 
5977
The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
5978
particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
5979
@table @code
5980
@item comdat
5981
indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
5982
@item .gnu.linkonce
5983
an alias for comdat
5984
@end table
5985
 
5986
Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
5987
the Merge flag should come first, like this:
5988
 
5989
@smallexample
5990
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5991
@end smallexample
5992
 
5993
If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
5994
@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
5995
present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
5996
this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
5997
@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
5998
If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
5999
 
6000
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
6001
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6002
none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6003
executable.  The section will contain data.
6004
 
6005
For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6006
directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6007
 
6008
@smallexample
6009
.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6010
@end smallexample
6011
 
6012
Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
6013
separated flags:
6014
@table @code
6015
@item #alloc
6016
section is allocatable
6017
@item #write
6018
section is writable
6019
@item #execinstr
6020
section is executable
6021
@item #exclude
6022
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6023
@item #tls
6024
section is used for thread local storage
6025
@end table
6026
 
6027
This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
6028
contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6029
some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6030
work.
6031
@end ifset
6032
@end ifset
6033
 
6034
@node Set
6035
@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6036
 
6037
@cindex @code{set} directive
6038
@cindex symbol value, setting
6039
Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
6040
changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6041
@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6042
flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6043
 
6044
You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6045
 
6046
If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6047
file is the last value stored into it.
6048
 
6049
@ifset Z80
6050
On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6051
@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6052
@end ifset
6053
 
6054
@node Short
6055
@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6056
 
6057
@cindex @code{short} directive
6058
@ifset GENERIC
6059
@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6060
@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6061
 
6062
In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6063
numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6064
@end ifset
6065
@ifclear GENERIC
6066
@ifset W16
6067
@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6068
@end ifset
6069
@ifset W32
6070
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6071
a 16 bit number for each.
6072
@end ifset
6073
@end ifclear
6074
 
6075
@node Single
6076
@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6077
 
6078
@cindex @code{single} directive
6079
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
6080
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
6081
has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6082
@ifset GENERIC
6083
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6084
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6085
@end ifset
6086
@ifclear GENERIC
6087
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
6088
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6089
numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6090
@end ifset
6091
@end ifclear
6092
 
6093
@ifset COFF-ELF
6094
@node Size
6095
@section @code{.size}
6096
 
6097
This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6098
 
6099
@ifset COFF
6100
@ifset ELF
6101
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6102
@subheading COFF Version
6103
@end ifset
6104
 
6105
@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6106
For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6107
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6108
 
6109
@smallexample
6110
.size @var{expression}
6111
@end smallexample
6112
 
6113
@ifset BOUT
6114
@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6115
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6116
ignores it.
6117
@end ifset
6118
@end ifset
6119
 
6120
@ifset ELF
6121
@ifset COFF
6122
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6123
@subheading ELF Version
6124
@end ifset
6125
 
6126
@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6127
For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6128
 
6129
@smallexample
6130
.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6131
@end smallexample
6132
 
6133
This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6134
The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6135
arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6136
symbols.
6137
@end ifset
6138
@end ifset
6139
 
6140
@ifclear no-space-dir
6141
@node Skip
6142
@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6143
 
6144
@cindex @code{skip} directive
6145
@cindex filling memory
6146
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6147
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
6148
@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
6149
@samp{.space}.
6150
@end ifclear
6151
 
6152
@node Sleb128
6153
@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6154
 
6155
@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6156
@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
6157
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6158
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6159
 
6160
@ifclear no-space-dir
6161
@node Space
6162
@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6163
 
6164
@cindex @code{space} directive
6165
@cindex filling memory
6166
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6167
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
6168
and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
6169
as @samp{.skip}.
6170
 
6171
@ifset HPPA
6172
@quotation
6173
@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6174
targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6175
Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6176
@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6177
for a summary.
6178
@end quotation
6179
@end ifset
6180
@end ifclear
6181
 
6182
@ifset have-stabs
6183
@node Stab
6184
@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6185
 
6186
@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6187
@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6188
There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6189
All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6190
The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6191
cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6192
Up to five fields are required:
6193
 
6194
@table @var
6195
@item string
6196
This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
6197
@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
6198
debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6199
using this field.
6200
 
6201
@item type
6202
An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6203
this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6204
and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6205
 
6206
@item other
6207
An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6208
low 8 bits of this expression.
6209
 
6210
@item desc
6211
An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6212
bits of this expression.
6213
 
6214
@item value
6215
An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6216
@end table
6217
 
6218
If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6219
or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6220
you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
6221
compatible with earlier assemblers!
6222
 
6223
@table @code
6224
@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6225
@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6226
 
6227
The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6228
It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
6229
null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6230
strings.
6231
 
6232
The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6233
relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6234
is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6235
assembled.
6236
 
6237
@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6238
@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6239
The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6240
 
6241
@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6242
@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6243
All five fields are specified.
6244
@end table
6245
@end ifset
6246
@c end     have-stabs
6247
 
6248
@node String
6249
@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6250
"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6251
 
6252
@cindex string, copying to object file
6253
@cindex string8, copying to object file
6254
@cindex string16, copying to object file
6255
@cindex string32, copying to object file
6256
@cindex string64, copying to object file
6257
@cindex @code{string} directive
6258
@cindex @code{string8} directive
6259
@cindex @code{string16} directive
6260
@cindex @code{string32} directive
6261
@cindex @code{string64} directive
6262
 
6263
Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
6264
one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
6265
particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6266
You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6267
 
6268
The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6269
the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6270
copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
6271
are stored in target endianness byte order.
6272
 
6273
Example:
6274
@smallexample
6275
        .string32 "BYE"
6276
expands to:
6277
        .string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
6278
        .string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
6279
@end smallexample
6280
 
6281
 
6282
@node Struct
6283
@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6284
 
6285
@cindex @code{struct} directive
6286
Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6287
which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
6288
@smallexample
6289
        .struct 0
6290
field1:
6291
        .struct field1 + 4
6292
field2:
6293
        .struct field2 + 4
6294
field3:
6295
@end smallexample
6296
This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6297
@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6298
value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6299
use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6300
before further assembly.
6301
 
6302
@ifset ELF
6303
@node SubSection
6304
@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6305
 
6306
@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6307
@cindex Section Stack
6308
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6309
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6310
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6311
(@pxref{Previous}).
6312
 
6313
This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
6314
section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6315
in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6316
@end ifset
6317
 
6318
@ifset ELF
6319
@node Symver
6320
@section @code{.symver}
6321
@cindex @code{symver} directive
6322
@cindex symbol versioning
6323
@cindex versions of symbols
6324
Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6325
within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6326
typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6327
There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6328
into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6329
shared library.
6330
 
6331
For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6332
@smallexample
6333
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6334
@end smallexample
6335
If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6336
being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6337
alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6338
just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6339
permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6340
of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
6341
itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6342
have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6343
file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6344
function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6345
the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6346
building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
6347
symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6348
nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6349
 
6350
If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6351
references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
6352
reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6353
symbol table.
6354
 
6355
Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6356
@smallexample
6357
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6358
@end smallexample
6359
In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6360
the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6361
difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6362
references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6363
 
6364
The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6365
@smallexample
6366
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6367
@end smallexample
6368
When @var{name} is not defined within the
6369
file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6370
@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6371
name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6372
@end ifset
6373
 
6374
@ifset COFF
6375
@node Tag
6376
@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6377
 
6378
@cindex COFF structure debugging
6379
@cindex structure debugging, COFF
6380
@cindex @code{tag} directive
6381
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6382
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
6383
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
6384
definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6385
@ifset BOUT
6386
 
6387
@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6388
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6389
ignores it.
6390
@end ifset
6391
@end ifset
6392
 
6393
@node Text
6394
@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6395
 
6396
@cindex @code{text} directive
6397
Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6398
the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6399
expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6400
is used.
6401
 
6402
@node Title
6403
@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6404
 
6405
@cindex @code{title} directive
6406
@cindex listing control: title line
6407
Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6408
source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6409
 
6410
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6411
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6412
 
6413
@ifset COFF-ELF
6414
@node Type
6415
@section @code{.type}
6416
 
6417
This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6418
 
6419
@ifset COFF
6420
@ifset ELF
6421
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6422
@subheading COFF Version
6423
@end ifset
6424
 
6425
@cindex COFF symbol type
6426
@cindex symbol type, COFF
6427
@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6428
For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6429
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6430
 
6431
@smallexample
6432
.type @var{int}
6433
@end smallexample
6434
 
6435
This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6436
entry.
6437
 
6438
@ifset BOUT
6439
@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6440
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6441
directive but ignores it.
6442
@end ifset
6443
@end ifset
6444
 
6445
@ifset ELF
6446
@ifset COFF
6447
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6448
@subheading ELF Version
6449
@end ifset
6450
 
6451
@cindex ELF symbol type
6452
@cindex symbol type, ELF
6453
@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6454
For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6455
 
6456
@smallexample
6457
.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6458
@end smallexample
6459
 
6460
This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6461
function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
6462
supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6463
compatibility with various other assemblers.
6464
 
6465
Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6466
@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6467
below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
6468
the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6469
maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6470
assemblers.
6471
 
6472
The syntaxes supported are:
6473
 
6474
@smallexample
6475
  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6476
  .type <name>,#<type>
6477
  .type <name>,@@<type>
6478
  .type <name>,%<type>
6479
  .type <name>,"<type>"
6480
@end smallexample
6481
 
6482
The types supported are:
6483
 
6484
@table @gcctabopt
6485
@item STT_FUNC
6486
@itemx function
6487
Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6488
 
6489
@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6490
@itemx gnu_indirect_function
6491
Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6492 160 khays
processing.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6493 147 khays
 
6494
@item STT_OBJECT
6495
@itemx object
6496
Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6497
 
6498
@item STT_TLS
6499
@itemx tls_object
6500
Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6501
 
6502
@item STT_COMMON
6503
@itemx common
6504
Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6505
 
6506
@item STT_NOTYPE
6507
@itemx notype
6508
Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
6509
 
6510
@item gnu_unique_object
6511
Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
6512
will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6513 160 khays
name and type in use.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6514
systems).
6515 147 khays
 
6516
@end table
6517
 
6518
Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6519
 
6520
@end ifset
6521
@end ifset
6522
 
6523
@node Uleb128
6524
@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6525
 
6526
@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6527
@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
6528
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6529
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6530
 
6531
@ifset COFF
6532
@node Val
6533
@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6534
 
6535
@cindex @code{val} directive
6536
@cindex COFF value attribute
6537
@cindex value attribute, COFF
6538
This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6539
records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6540
entry.
6541
@ifset BOUT
6542
 
6543
@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6544
configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6545
@end ifset
6546
@end ifset
6547
 
6548
@ifset ELF
6549
@node Version
6550
@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6551
 
6552
@cindex @code{version} directive
6553
This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6554
formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6555
@end ifset
6556
 
6557
@ifset ELF
6558
@node VTableEntry
6559
@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6560
 
6561
@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6562
This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6563
@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6564
 
6565
@node VTableInherit
6566
@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6567
 
6568
@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6569
This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6570
@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6571
parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
6572
parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6573
@end ifset
6574
 
6575
@node Warning
6576
@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6577
@cindex warning directive
6578
Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6579
(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6580
 
6581
@node Weak
6582
@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6583
 
6584
@cindex @code{weak} directive
6585
This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6586
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6587
 
6588
On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
6589
directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6590
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6591
 
6592
On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6593
When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6594
alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6595
 
6596
@node Weakref
6597
@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6598
 
6599
@cindex @code{weakref} directive
6600
This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6601
be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6602
If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6603
will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6604
symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6605
 
6606
The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6607
assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6608
symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6609
resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6610
had the references to the alias removed.
6611
 
6612
The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6613
within the assembler.
6614
 
6615
@node Word
6616
@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6617
 
6618
@cindex @code{word} directive
6619
This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6620
separated by commas.
6621
@ifclear GENERIC
6622
@ifset W32
6623
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6624
@end ifset
6625
@ifset W16
6626
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6627
@end ifset
6628
@end ifclear
6629
@ifset GENERIC
6630
 
6631
The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6632
depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6633
@end ifset
6634
 
6635
@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6636
@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6637
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6638
@cindex difference tables altered
6639
@cindex altered difference tables
6640
@quotation
6641
@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6642
@end quotation
6643
 
6644
@ifset GENERIC
6645
Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6646
addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
6647
interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6648
@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6649
 
6650
@end ifset
6651
In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6652
@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6653
Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6654
compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6655
directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6656
@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6657
creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6658
This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6659
first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
6660
of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
6661
table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
6662
contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6663
@code{sym2}.
6664
 
6665
If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6666
secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
6667
@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6668
long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6669
and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6670
minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6671
entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6672
 
6673
@ifset INTERNALS
6674
@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6675
@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6676
assembly language programmers.
6677
@end ifset
6678
@end ifset
6679
@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6680
 
6681
@node Deprecated
6682
@section Deprecated Directives
6683
 
6684
@cindex deprecated directives
6685
@cindex obsolescent directives
6686
One day these directives won't work.
6687
They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6688
@table @t
6689
@item .abort
6690
@item .line
6691
@end table
6692
 
6693
@ifset ELF
6694
@node Object Attributes
6695
@chapter Object Attributes
6696
@cindex object attributes
6697
 
6698
@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6699
into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
6700
Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
6701
point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6702
requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6703
passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6704
hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
6705
generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6706
newer generation at run-time.
6707
 
6708
This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
6709
@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
6710
time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6711
correctly.
6712
 
6713
Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
6714
attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
6715
string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
6716
and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
6717
or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
6718
attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6719
 
6720
Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6721
The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6722
 
6723
@menu
6724
* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6725
* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
6726
@end menu
6727
 
6728
@node GNU Object Attributes
6729
@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6730
 
6731
The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6732
with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6733
 
6734
Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6735
its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6736
an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6737
2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6738
architecture-dependent ones.
6739
 
6740
@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6741
 
6742
These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6743
 
6744
@table @r
6745
@item Tag_compatibility (32)
6746
The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
6747
the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
6748
then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
6749
than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6750
arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6751
@end table
6752
 
6753
@subsection MIPS Attributes
6754
 
6755
@table @r
6756
@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6757
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6758
 
6759
@itemize @bullet
6760
@item
6761
 
6762
@item
6763
1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6764
FPU.
6765
@item
6766
2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6767
@item
6768
3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6769
@item
6770
4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6771
double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6772
purpose registers.
6773
@end itemize
6774
@end table
6775
 
6776
@subsection PowerPC Attributes
6777
 
6778
@table @r
6779
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6780
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6781
 
6782
@itemize @bullet
6783
@item
6784
 
6785
@item
6786
1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6787
@item
6788
2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6789
@item
6790
3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6791
@end itemize
6792
 
6793
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6794
The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6795
 
6796
@itemize @bullet
6797
@item
6798
 
6799
@item
6800
1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6801
@item
6802
2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6803
@item
6804
3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6805
@end itemize
6806
@end table
6807
 
6808
@node Defining New Object Attributes
6809
@section Defining New Object Attributes
6810
 
6811
If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6812
will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6813
mailing list.
6814
 
6815
@itemize @bullet
6816
@item
6817
This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6818
@item
6819
The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6820
@item
6821
The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6822
and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6823
@item
6824
Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6825
@item
6826
@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6827
@item
6828
GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6829
@end itemize
6830
 
6831
@end ifset
6832
 
6833
@ifset GENERIC
6834
@node Machine Dependencies
6835
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6836
 
6837
@cindex machine dependencies
6838
The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6839
each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
6840
vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6841
directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6842
assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
6843
@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6844
optimization.
6845
 
6846
This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6847
include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
6848
subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6849
 
6850
@menu
6851
@ifset ALPHA
6852
* Alpha-Dependent::             Alpha Dependent Features
6853
@end ifset
6854
@ifset ARC
6855
* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
6856
@end ifset
6857
@ifset ARM
6858
* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
6859
@end ifset
6860
@ifset AVR
6861
* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
6862
@end ifset
6863
@ifset Blackfin
6864
* Blackfin-Dependent::          Blackfin Dependent Features
6865
@end ifset
6866
@ifset CR16
6867
* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
6868
@end ifset
6869
@ifset CRIS
6870
* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
6871
@end ifset
6872
@ifset D10V
6873
* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
6874
@end ifset
6875
@ifset D30V
6876
* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
6877
@end ifset
6878 163 khays
@ifset EPIPHANY
6879
* Epiphany-Dependent::          EPIPHANY Dependent Features
6880
@end ifset
6881 147 khays
@ifset H8/300
6882
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6883
@end ifset
6884
@ifset HPPA
6885
* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
6886
@end ifset
6887
@ifset I370
6888
* ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6889
@end ifset
6890
@ifset I80386
6891
* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6892
@end ifset
6893
@ifset I860
6894
* i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6895
@end ifset
6896
@ifset I960
6897
* i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6898
@end ifset
6899
@ifset IA64
6900
* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6901
@end ifset
6902
@ifset IP2K
6903
* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
6904
@end ifset
6905
@ifset LM32
6906
* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
6907
@end ifset
6908
@ifset M32C
6909
* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
6910
@end ifset
6911
@ifset M32R
6912
* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
6913
@end ifset
6914
@ifset M680X0
6915
* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
6916
@end ifset
6917
@ifset M68HC11
6918
* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
6919
@end ifset
6920
@ifset MICROBLAZE
6921
* MicroBlaze-Dependent::        MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
6922
@end ifset
6923
@ifset MIPS
6924
* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
6925
@end ifset
6926
@ifset MMIX
6927
* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
6928
@end ifset
6929
@ifset MSP430
6930
* MSP430-Dependent::            MSP430 Dependent Features
6931
@end ifset
6932
@ifset NS32K
6933
* NS32K-Dependent::             NS32K Dependent Features
6934
@end ifset
6935
@ifset SH
6936
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
6937
* SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
6938
@end ifset
6939
@ifset PDP11
6940
* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
6941
@end ifset
6942
@ifset PJ
6943
* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
6944
@end ifset
6945
@ifset PPC
6946
* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
6947
@end ifset
6948 163 khays
@ifset RL78
6949
* RL78-Dependent::              RL78 Dependent Features
6950
@end ifset
6951 147 khays
@ifset RX
6952
* RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
6953
@end ifset
6954
@ifset S390
6955
* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
6956
@end ifset
6957
@ifset SCORE
6958
* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
6959
@end ifset
6960
@ifset SPARC
6961
* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
6962
@end ifset
6963
@ifset TIC54X
6964
* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
6965
@end ifset
6966
@ifset TIC6X
6967
* TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
6968
@end ifset
6969 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
6970
* TILE-Gx-Dependent ::          Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
6971
@end ifset
6972
@ifset TILEPRO
6973
* TILEPro-Dependent ::          Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
6974
@end ifset
6975 147 khays
@ifset V850
6976
* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
6977
@end ifset
6978 160 khays
@ifset XSTORMY16
6979
* XSTORMY16-Dependent::         XStormy16 Dependent Features
6980
@end ifset
6981 147 khays
@ifset XTENSA
6982
* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
6983
@end ifset
6984
@ifset Z80
6985
* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
6986
@end ifset
6987
@ifset Z8000
6988
* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
6989
@end ifset
6990
@ifset VAX
6991
* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
6992
@end ifset
6993
@end menu
6994
 
6995
@lowersections
6996
@end ifset
6997
 
6998
@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
6999
@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
7000
@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7001
@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7002
@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7003
@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7004
@c in both conditional blocks.
7005
 
7006
@ifset ALPHA
7007
@include c-alpha.texi
7008
@end ifset
7009
 
7010
@ifset ARC
7011
@include c-arc.texi
7012
@end ifset
7013
 
7014
@ifset ARM
7015
@include c-arm.texi
7016
@end ifset
7017
 
7018
@ifset AVR
7019
@include c-avr.texi
7020
@end ifset
7021
 
7022
@ifset Blackfin
7023
@include c-bfin.texi
7024
@end ifset
7025
 
7026
@ifset CR16
7027
@include c-cr16.texi
7028
@end ifset
7029
 
7030
@ifset CRIS
7031
@include c-cris.texi
7032
@end ifset
7033
 
7034
@ifset Renesas-all
7035
@ifclear GENERIC
7036
@node Machine Dependencies
7037
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7038
 
7039
The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7040
and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
7041
chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7042
family.
7043
 
7044
@menu
7045
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7046
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
7047
@end menu
7048
@lowersections
7049
@end ifclear
7050
@end ifset
7051
 
7052
@ifset D10V
7053
@include c-d10v.texi
7054
@end ifset
7055
 
7056
@ifset D30V
7057
@include c-d30v.texi
7058
@end ifset
7059
 
7060 163 khays
@ifset EPIPHANY
7061
@include c-epiphany.texi
7062
@end ifset
7063
 
7064 147 khays
@ifset H8/300
7065
@include c-h8300.texi
7066
@end ifset
7067
 
7068
@ifset HPPA
7069
@include c-hppa.texi
7070
@end ifset
7071
 
7072
@ifset I370
7073
@include c-i370.texi
7074
@end ifset
7075
 
7076
@ifset I80386
7077
@include c-i386.texi
7078
@end ifset
7079
 
7080
@ifset I860
7081
@include c-i860.texi
7082
@end ifset
7083
 
7084
@ifset I960
7085
@include c-i960.texi
7086
@end ifset
7087
 
7088
@ifset IA64
7089
@include c-ia64.texi
7090
@end ifset
7091
 
7092
@ifset IP2K
7093
@include c-ip2k.texi
7094
@end ifset
7095
 
7096
@ifset LM32
7097
@include c-lm32.texi
7098
@end ifset
7099
 
7100
@ifset M32C
7101
@include c-m32c.texi
7102
@end ifset
7103
 
7104
@ifset M32R
7105
@include c-m32r.texi
7106
@end ifset
7107
 
7108
@ifset M680X0
7109
@include c-m68k.texi
7110
@end ifset
7111
 
7112
@ifset M68HC11
7113
@include c-m68hc11.texi
7114
@end ifset
7115
 
7116
@ifset MICROBLAZE
7117
@include c-microblaze.texi
7118
@end ifset
7119
 
7120
@ifset MIPS
7121
@include c-mips.texi
7122
@end ifset
7123
 
7124
@ifset MMIX
7125
@include c-mmix.texi
7126
@end ifset
7127
 
7128
@ifset MSP430
7129
@include c-msp430.texi
7130
@end ifset
7131
 
7132
@ifset NS32K
7133
@include c-ns32k.texi
7134
@end ifset
7135
 
7136
@ifset PDP11
7137
@include c-pdp11.texi
7138
@end ifset
7139
 
7140
@ifset PJ
7141
@include c-pj.texi
7142
@end ifset
7143
 
7144
@ifset PPC
7145
@include c-ppc.texi
7146
@end ifset
7147
 
7148 163 khays
@ifset RL78
7149
@include c-rl78.texi
7150
@end ifset
7151
 
7152 147 khays
@ifset RX
7153
@include c-rx.texi
7154
@end ifset
7155
 
7156
@ifset S390
7157
@include c-s390.texi
7158
@end ifset
7159
 
7160
@ifset SCORE
7161
@include c-score.texi
7162
@end ifset
7163
 
7164
@ifset SH
7165
@include c-sh.texi
7166
@include c-sh64.texi
7167
@end ifset
7168
 
7169
@ifset SPARC
7170
@include c-sparc.texi
7171
@end ifset
7172
 
7173
@ifset TIC54X
7174
@include c-tic54x.texi
7175
@end ifset
7176
 
7177
@ifset TIC6X
7178
@include c-tic6x.texi
7179
@end ifset
7180
 
7181 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
7182
@include c-tilegx.texi
7183
@end ifset
7184
 
7185
@ifset TILEPRO
7186
@include c-tilepro.texi
7187
@end ifset
7188
 
7189 147 khays
@ifset Z80
7190
@include c-z80.texi
7191
@end ifset
7192
 
7193
@ifset Z8000
7194
@include c-z8k.texi
7195
@end ifset
7196
 
7197
@ifset VAX
7198
@include c-vax.texi
7199
@end ifset
7200
 
7201
@ifset V850
7202
@include c-v850.texi
7203
@end ifset
7204
 
7205 160 khays
@ifset XSTORMY16
7206
@include c-xstormy16.texi
7207
@end ifset
7208
 
7209 147 khays
@ifset XTENSA
7210
@include c-xtensa.texi
7211
@end ifset
7212
 
7213
@ifset GENERIC
7214
@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7215
@raisesections
7216
@end ifset
7217
 
7218
@node Reporting Bugs
7219
@chapter Reporting Bugs
7220
@cindex bugs in assembler
7221
@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7222
 
7223
Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7224
 
7225
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7226
not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7227
entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7228
Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7229
 
7230
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7231
information that enables us to fix the bug.
7232
 
7233
@menu
7234
* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7235
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7236
@end menu
7237
 
7238
@node Bug Criteria
7239
@section Have You Found a Bug?
7240
@cindex bug criteria
7241
 
7242
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7243
 
7244
@itemize @bullet
7245
@cindex fatal signal
7246
@cindex assembler crash
7247
@cindex crash of assembler
7248
@item
7249
If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7250
@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
7251
 
7252
@cindex error on valid input
7253
@item
7254
If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7255
 
7256
@cindex invalid input
7257
@item
7258
If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7259
is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7260
be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7261
 
7262
@item
7263
If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7264
of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7265
@end itemize
7266
 
7267
@node Bug Reporting
7268
@section How to Report Bugs
7269
@cindex bug reports
7270
@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7271
 
7272
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
7273
you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7274
contact that organization first.
7275
 
7276
You can find contact information for many support companies and
7277
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7278
distribution.
7279
 
7280
@ifset BUGURL
7281
In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7282
to @value{BUGURL}.
7283
@end ifset
7284
 
7285
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7286
@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7287
fact or leave it out, state it!
7288
 
7289
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7290
and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
7291
name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
7292
not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7293
happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7294
perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7295
the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
7296
give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7297
and the most helpful.
7298
 
7299
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7300
it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7301
that the bug has not been reported previously.
7302
 
7303
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7304
bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
7305
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7306
You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7307
 
7308
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7309
 
7310
@itemize @bullet
7311
@item
7312
The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7313
it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7314
 
7315
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7316
the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7317
 
7318
@item
7319
Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7320
 
7321
@item
7322
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7323
version number.
7324
 
7325
@item
7326
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7327
``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7328
 
7329
@item
7330
The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7331
observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7332
all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7333
 
7334
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7335
and then we might not encounter the bug.
7336
 
7337
@item
7338
A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
7339
the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7340
high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7341
when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7342
the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7343
file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7344
@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7345
 
7346
@item
7347
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7348
incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7349
 
7350
Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7351
will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7352
notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
7353
make a mistake.
7354
 
7355
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7356
explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7357
@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7358
library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
7359
would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7360
would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
7361
expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7362
observations.
7363
 
7364
@item
7365
If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7366
diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7367
option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
7368
discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7369
by line number.
7370
 
7371
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7372
sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7373
@end itemize
7374
 
7375
Here are some things that are not necessary:
7376
 
7377
@itemize @bullet
7378
@item
7379
A description of the envelope of the bug.
7380
 
7381
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7382
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7383
changes will not affect it.
7384
 
7385
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7386
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7387
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7388
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7389
 
7390
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7391
of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
7392
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7393
less time, and so on.
7394
 
7395
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7396
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7397
 
7398
@item
7399
A patch for the bug.
7400
 
7401
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
7402
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7403
a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
7404
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7405
 
7406
Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7407
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7408
the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7409
one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7410
 
7411
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7412
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
7413
help us to understand.
7414
 
7415
@item
7416
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7417
 
7418
Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
7419
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7420
@end itemize
7421
 
7422
@node Acknowledgements
7423
@chapter Acknowledgements
7424
 
7425
If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7426
it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
7427
maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
7428
@c (January 1994),
7429
the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7430
 
7431
Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7432
more details?}
7433
 
7434
Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7435
information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7436
extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7437
 
7438
K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7439
many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7440
up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7441
testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7442
including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7443
and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7444
support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7445
port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7446
file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7447
assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7448
 
7449
Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7450
in format-specific I/O modules.
7451
 
7452
The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
7453
has done much work with it since.
7454
 
7455
The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7456
 
7457
Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7458
 
7459
The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7460
University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7461
 
7462
Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7463
(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7464
(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7465
support a.out format.
7466
 
7467
Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7468
tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7469
Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7470
use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7471
targets.
7472
 
7473
John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7474
simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
7475
updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7476
fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7477
remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7478
cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7479
required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7480
 
7481
Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7482
68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7483
added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7484
PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7485
 
7486
Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7487
 
7488
Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7489
 
7490
Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7491
along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7492
formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7493
the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7494
 
7495
Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7496
Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7497
Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7498
Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7499
and some initial 64-bit support).
7500
 
7501
Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7502
 
7503
Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7504
support for openVMS/Alpha.
7505
 
7506
Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7507
flavors.
7508
 
7509
David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7510
Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7511
 
7512
Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7513
configuration enhancements.
7514
 
7515
Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7516
 
7517
Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
7518
you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7519
want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7520
intentionally leaving anyone out.
7521
 
7522
@node GNU Free Documentation License
7523
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7524
@include fdl.texi
7525
 
7526
@node AS Index
7527
@unnumbered AS Index
7528
 
7529
@printindex cp
7530
 
7531
@bye
7532
@c Local Variables:
7533
@c fill-column: 79
7534
@c End:

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.